Sony DSC-F505V Service manual

Download

Page 1

DSC-F505V

SERVICE MANUAL

Level 2

Ver 1.1 2001.10

This service manual contains information for Japanese model as well.

On the PS-434, SY-62 boards

This service manual procides the information that is premised the circuit board replacement service and not intended repair inside the PS-434, SY-62 boards. Therefore, schematic diagram, printed wiring board and electrical parts list of the PS-434, SY-62 boards are not shown. The following pages are not shown.

US Model

Canadian Model

AEP Model

UK Model

E Model

Hong K ong Model

Australian Model

Chinese Model

Korea Model

Tourist Model

Japanese Model

PS-434 board

Schematic diagram.....................................Page 4-15 to 4-20

Printed wiring board ...................................Page 4-11 to 4-14

Electrical parts list ......................................Page 6-13 to 6-14

SY-62 board

Schematic diagram.....................................Page 4-23 to 4-26

Printed wiring board ...................................Page 4-21 to 4-22

Electrical parts list ......................................Page 6-14 to 6-15

The above-described information is shown in service manual Level 3.

System

Image device

1/1.8 ty pe color CCD

Lens

5 × zoom lens f = 7.1 – 35.5 mm (38 – 190 mm when converted into a 35 mm still camera) F = 2.8 – 3.3

Exposure control

Automatic exposure

White balance

Automatic, Indoor, Outdoor, One-push

Data system

Movie: MPEG1 Still: JPEG, GIF (in TEXT mode), TIFF Audio with still image: MPEG1 (Monaural)

Recording medium

“Memory Stick”

Flash

Recommended recording distance: 11 7/8 inches to 8 1/4 feet (0.3 m to 2.5 m)

Output connector

A/V OUT (Monaural)

Minijack Video: 1 Vp-p, 75Ω, unbalanced, sync negative Audio: 327 mV (at a 47 kΩ load) Output impedance: 2.2 k

Ω

SPECIFICATIONS

Digital I/O (USB)

Special minijack

External flash jack

Minijack

LCD screen

Used LCD panel

2 type TFT (Thin Film Transistor active matrix) drive

Total number of dots

122,980 (559 × 220) dots

General

Used battery pa ck

NP-FS11

Power requirements

3.6 V

Power consumption (during recording)

3.3 W

Operation temperature

32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)

Storage temperature

–4°F to +140°F (–20°C to +60°C)

Maximum dimensions

Approx. 4 1/4 × 2 1/2 × 5 3/8 inches (107 × 62× 136 mm) (w/h/d)

Mass

Approx. 1 lb (475 g) (including battery pack NPFS11, “Memory Stick,” lens cap, etc.)

Built-in microphone

Electret condenser microphone

Built-in speaker

Dynamic speaker

AC-VF10 AC power adaptor/charger

Power requirements

100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz

Rated output voltage

DC OUT: DC 4.2 V , 1.8 A in operating mode Battery charge terminal: DC 4.2 V, 1.5 A in charge mode

Operation temperature

32°F to 104°F (0°C to 40°C)

Storage temperature

–4°F to +140°F (–20°C to +60°C)

Maximum dimensions

1 15/16 × 1 9/16 × 3 3/8 inches (49 × 39 × 85 mm) (w/h/d)

Mass

Approx. 4.2 oz (120 g)

DIGITAL STILL CAMERA

NP-FS11 battery pack

Used battery

Lithium ion battery

Maximum voltage

DC 4.2 V

Nominal voltage

DC 3.6 V

Capacity

4.1 Wh (1 140 mAh)

Design and specifications are subject to change without notice.

Page 2

Supplied accessories

123

4567

890qa

1 AC-VF10 AC power adaptor/charger,

Power cord (1)

2 A/V connecting cable (1) 3 NP-FS11 Battery pack (1) 4 DK-115 DC connecting cable (1) 5 Wrist strap (1) 6 Memory Stick (8MB) (1) 7 Lens cap/Lens cap strap (1) 8 CD-ROM (1) 9 Conversion plug 3P adaptor (1)

UK, Hong Kong model

0 2-pin conversion adaptor (1)

E model

qa 2-pin conversion adaptor (1)

Tour ist model

qs USB cable (1)

SAFETY-RELATED COMPONENT WARNING!!

COMPONENTS IDENTIFIED BY MARK 0 OR DOTTED LINE WITH MARK 0 ON THE SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND IN THE PARTS LIST ARE CRITICAL TO SAFE OPERATION. REPLACE THESE COMPONENTS WITH SONY PARTS WHOSE PART NUMBERS APPEAR AS SHOWN IN THIS MANUAL OR IN SUPPLEMENTS PUBLISHED BY SONY.

SAFETY CHECK-OUT

After correcting the original service problem, perform the following safety checks before releasing the set to the customer.

1. Check the area of your repair for unsoldered or poorly-soldered connections. Check the entire board surface for solder splashes and bridges.

2. Check the interboard wiring to ensure that no wires are “pinched” or contact high-wattage resistors.

3. Look for unauthorized replacement parts, particularly transistors, that were installed during a previous repair. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

ATTENTION AU COMPOSANT AYANT RAPPORT

À LA SÉCURITÉ!

LES COMPOSANTS IDENTIFIÉS P AR UNE MARQUE 0 SUR LES DIAGRAMMES SCHÉMATIQUES ET LA LISTE DES PIÈCES SONT CRITIQUES POUR LA SÉCURITÉ DE FONCTIONNEMENT. NE REMPLACER CES COMPOSANTS QUE PAR DES PIÈCES SONY DONT LES NUMÉROS SONT DONNÉS DANS CE MANUEL OU DANS LES SUPPLÉMENTS PUBLIÉS PAR SONY.

4. Look for parts which, though functioning, show obvious signs of deterioration. Point them out to the customer and recommend their replacement.

5. Check the B+ voltage to see it is at the values specified.

6. Flexible Circuit Board Repairing

• Keep the temperature of the soldering iron around 270 ˚C

during repairing.

• Do not touch the soldering iron on the same conductor of

the circuit board (within 3 times).

• Be careful not to apply force on the conductor when sol-

dering or unsoldering.

– 2 –

Page 3

Section Title Page Section Title Page

SERVICE NOTE................................................................... 5

1. GENERAL

Identifying the Parts................................................................. 1-1

Preparing the Power Supply.................................................... 1-2

Setting the Date and Time....................................................... 1-3

Inserting the “Memory Stick” ................................................... 1-4

Recording Still Images ............................................................ 1-4

Recording Moving Images....................................................... 1-5

Playing Back Still Images ........................................................ 1-5

Playing Back Moving Images .................................................. 1-6

Viewing Images Using a Personal Computer ......................... 1-6

Image File Storage Destinations and Image Files.................. 1-7

Before Performing Advanced Operations ............................... 1-7

Various Recording ................................................................... 1-9

Various Playback ..................................................................... 1-11

Editing ..................................................................................... 1-12

Precautions.............................................................................. 1-14

On “Memory Sticks” ................................................................. 1-14

Using Your Camera Abroad ..................................................... 1-14

Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 1-14

Warning and Notice Messages ............................................... 1-15

Self-diagnosis Display ............................................................. 1-16

LCD Screen Indicators ............................................................ 1-16

2. DISASSEMBLY

• Attachment of CPC-9 Jig ...................................................... 2-1

2-1. Rear Cabinet Block ....................................................... 2-2

2-2. Zoom Lens Block ........................................................... 2-2

2-3 Cabinet (LT) Block ......................................................... 2-3

2-4. Lens Block ..................................................................... 2-3

2-5. LCD Panel Block, Control Switch Block (FK) ............... 2-4

2-6. HI-73, DD-148 Boards, Battery Holder Block ............... 2-5

2-7. Upper Cabinet Block, Flash Unit (MC) ......................... 2-5

2-8. Front Cabinet Assembly ................................................ 2-6

2-9. Removal and Attachment of FP-37 Flexible Board ...... 2-7

2-10. To Fold the New FP-37 Flexible Board ......................... 2-7

2-11. Cr ystal Indication Module ............................................. 2-8

2-12. Flash Unit (ST) .............................................................. 2-8

2.13. Circuit Boards Location................................................. 2-9

2-14. Flexible Boards Location............................................... 2-9

3. BLOCK DIAGRAMS

3-1. Overall Block Diagram................................................... 3-1

3-8. Power Block Diagram 1 ................................................. 3-15

3-9. Power Block Diagram 2 ................................................. 3-17

3-10. Power Block Diagram 3................................................. 3-19

4. PRINTED WIRING BOARDS AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

4-1. Frame Schematic Diagrams.......................................... 4-3

Frame Schematic Diagram (1/2)................................... 4-3

Frame Schematic Diagram (2/2)................................... 4-5

4-2. Printed Wiring Boards and Schematic Diagrams ......... 4-7

CD-283 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... 4-7

CD-283 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-9

HI-73 Printed Wiring Board ........................................... 4-27

HI-73 (LCD Drive) Schematic Diagram......................... 4-31

HI-73 (Timing Generator) Schematic Diagram ............. 4-33

HI-73 (Video) Schematic Diagram ................................ 4-35

HI-73 (Audio) Schematic Diagram ................................ 4-37

HI-73 (USB I/F) Schematic Diagram............................. 4-39

HI-73 (Hi Control) Schematic Diagram ......................... 4-41

DD-148 Printed Wiring Board ....................................... 4-43

DD-148 Schematic Diagram ......................................... 4-45

CN-121 Printed Wiring Board and

Schematic Diagram ....................................................... 4-47

FK Schematic Diagram ................................................. 4-49

CF/MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK, ST

Schematic Diagrams ..................................................... 4-51

PW, MC Schematic Diagrams....................................... 4-52

4-3. Waveforms ..................................................................... 4-53

4-4. Parts Location ............................................................... 4-56

5. ADJUSTMENTS

Before Starting Adjustment ..................................................... 5-1

1-1. Adjusting Items when Replacing

Main Parts and Boards.................................................. 5-2

5-1. Camera Section Adjustment ......................................... 5-3

1-1. Preparations Before Adjustment ................................... 5-3

1-1-1. List of Service Tools ................................................. 5-3

1-1-2. Preparations ............................................................. 5-4

1-1-3. Discharging of the Flashlight Power Supply ............ 5-4

1-1-4. Precautions .............................................................. 5-6

1. Setting the Switch .................................................... 5-6

2. Order of Adjustments ............................................... 5-6

3. Subjects.................................................................... 5-6

4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box ....................... 5-7

1-2. Initialization of B, D, E, F, 7 Page Data ......................... 5-8

1-2-1. Initialization of D Page Data .................................... 5-8

1. Initializing D Page Data............................................ 5-8

2. Modification of D Page Data .................................... 5-8

3. D Page Table ............................................................ 5-8

1-2-2. Initialization of B, E, F, 7 Page Data ........................ 5-9

1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data................................ 5-9

2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data ........................ 5-9

3. B Page Table ............................................................ 5-9

4. E Page Table ............................................................ 5-9

5. F Page Table............................................................. 5-10

6. 7 Page Table............................................................. 5-11

1-3. Video System Adjustments ........................................... 5-12

1. Video Sync Level Adjustment ....................................... 5-12

2. Video Burst Level Adjustment ....................................... 5-12

1-4. Camera System Adjustment ......................................... 5-13

1. HALL Adjustment .......................................................... 5-13

2. Flange Back Adjustment

(Using the minipattern box)........................................... 5-14

3. Flange Back Check ....................................................... 5-15

4. F No. Standard Data Input ............................................ 5-16

5. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment.................................... 5-16

6. Picture Frame Setting.................................................... 5-17

7. Light Level Adjustment and ND Shutter Check ............ 5-18

8. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment .................................... 5-18

9. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input ..................... 5-19

10. Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation ............... 5-19

11. Auto White Balance Adjustment ................................... 5-20

12. Color Reproduction Adjustment .................................... 5-21

12-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment

(Without ND Filter) ................................................... 5-21

12-2. Color Reproduction Adjustment (With ND Filter) .... 5-21

13. Color Reproduction Check............................................ 5-22

14. White Balance Check.................................................... 5-23

15. Strobe White Balance Adjustment ................................ 5-24

16. Strobe Light Level and White Balance Check .............. 5-24

17. CCD Black Defect Compensation................................. 5-25

18. CCD White Defect Compensation ................................ 5-25

1-5. LCD System Adjustments ............................................. 5-26

1. LCD Initial Data Input.................................................... 5-27

2. VCO Adjustment (HI-73 Board) .................................... 5-27

3. D Range Adjustment (HI-73 Board).............................. 5-28

4. Bright Adjustment (HI-73 Board)................................... 5-28

5. Contrast Adjustment (HI-73 Board) .............................. 5-29

6. Color Adjustment (HI-73 Board) ................................... 5-29

7. V-COM Level Adjustment (HI-73 Board)....................... 5-30

8. V-COM Adjustment (HI-73 Board) ................................ 5-30

9. White Balance Adjustment (HI-73 Board)..................... 5-31

1-6. System Control System Adjustments ........................... 5-32

1. Battery Down Adjustment ............................................. 5-32

2. ZOOM-VR Center Adjustment ...................................... 5-33

5-2. Service Mode ................................................................ 5-34

2-1. Adjusting Remote Commander ..................................... 5-34

– 3 –

Page 4

Section Title Page

1. Used Adjusting Remote Commander ........................... 5-34

2. Precautions upon Using

the Adjusting Remote Commander............................... 5-34

2-2. Data Process ................................................................. 5-35

2-3. Service Mode ................................................................ 5-36

1. Setting the Test Mode.................................................... 5-36

2. Bit Value Discrimination ................................................ 5-36

3. Balance Sensor Check.................................................. 5-36

4. Switch Check (1) ........................................................... 5-36

5. Switch Check (2) ........................................................... 5-37

6. REPAIR PARTS LIST

6-1. Exploded Views ............................................................. 6-1

6-1-1. Battery Holder Assembly ......................................... 6-1

6-1-2. Front Cabinet Assembly........................................... 6-2

6-1-3. Rear Cabinet Assembly ........................................... 6-3

6-1-4. Lens Cabinet Assembly ........................................... 6-4

6-1-5. Lens Assembly......................................................... 6-5

6-2. Electrical Parts List ....................................................... 6-6

* The color reproduction frame is shown on page 134.

The parts reference sheet is shown on page 135.

– 4 –

Page 5

SERVICE NOTE

When installing a connector, don’t press down at wire of connector. It is possible that a wire is snapped.

• NOTE FOR REPAIR

Make sure that the flat cable and flexible board are not cracked of bent at the terminal. Do not insert the cable insufficiently nor crookedly.

Cut and remove the part of gilt which comes off at the point. (Be careful or some pieces of gilt may be left inside)

When remove a connector, don’t pull at wire of connector. It is possible that a wire is snapped.

[Discharging of the FLASH unit’s charging capacitor]

The charging capacitor of the FLASH unit is charged up to the maximum 300 V potential. There is a danger of electric shock by this high voltage when the battery is handled by hand. The electric shock is caused by the charged voltage which is kept without discharging when the main power of the unit is simply turned off. Therefore, the remaining voltage must be discharged as described below.

Preparing the Short Jig

T o preparing the short jig, a small clip is attached to each end of a resistor of 1 kΩ /1 W (1-215-869-11). Wrap insulating tape fully around the leads of the resistor to prevent electrical shock.

1 kΩ/1 W

Wrap insulating tape.

Discharging the Capacitor

Short-circuit between the positive and the negative terminals of charged capacitor with the short jig about 10 seconds.

Flash unit (MC)

Capacitor

R: 1 kΩ/1 W (Part code: 1-215-869-11)

– 5 –

Page 6

[Description on Self-diagnosis Display]

Self-diagnosis display

• C: ss: ss You can reverse the camera malfunction yourself. (However , contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility when you cannot recover from the camera malfunction.)

• E: ss: ss Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

Display Code

C:04:ss

C:32:ss

C:13:ss

E:61:ss

E:91:ss

Use a NP-FS11/F10 battery pack.

Turn the power off and on again.

Format the “Memory stick”. Insert a new “Memory Stick”.

Checking of lens drive circuit.

Checking of flash unit or replacement of flash unit.

Countermeasure

You are using a battery pack that is not an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack.

Trouble with hardware.

Unformatted memory stick is inserted. Memory stick is broken.

When failed in the focus and zoom initialization.

Abnormality when flash is being charged.

Note : The error code is cleared if the battery is removed, except defective

flash, unit. *1: The error display is given in two ways. *2: When the flash charging failed, Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 04 are

written.

After repair, be sure to write Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 00.

Cause

Caution Display During Error

for “InfoLITHIUM” BATTERY ONLY

SYSTEM ERROR

FORMAT ERROR MEMORY STICK ERROR

—

– 6 –

Page 7

SECTION 1

GENERAL

DSC-F505V

This section is extracted from instruction manual.

WARNING

To prevent fire or shock hazard, do not expose the unit to rain or moisture.

For the Customers in the U.S.A.

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric s h ock to persons.

This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the

Never expose the battery pack to temperature above 140°F (60°C), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.

If you have any questions about this product, you may call:

or write to:

appliance.

Sony Customer Information Center 1-800-222-SONY (7669)

Sony Customer Information Center 1 Sony Drive, Mail Drop #T1-11, Park Ridge, NJ 07656

CAUTION

You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not expressly approved in this manual could void your authority to operate this equipment.

Declaration of Conformity

Trade Name: SONY Model No.: DSC-F505V Responsible Party:Sony Electronics Inc. Address: 1 Sony Drive, Park

Telephone No.: 201-930-6972

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Note:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference wi ll not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving

antenna.

— Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit dif fe rent from that t o whi ch the receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

Ridge, NJ 07656 USA

The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual must be used with this equipment in order to comply with the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules.

For the Customers in the U.S.A. and Canada

DISPOSAL OF LITHIUM ION BATTERY .

LITHIUM ION BATTERY. DISPOSE OF PROPERLY.

You can return your unwanted lithium ion batteries to your nearest Sony Service Center or Fac tory Service Center.

Note:

In some areas the disposal o f li thium ion batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited.

For the Sony Service Center near est yo u call 1-800-222-SONY (United States only) For the Sony Factory Servic e Cent er neare st you call 416-499-SONY (Canada only)

Caution:

Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium ion battery.

For the Customers in Canada

CAUTION

TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT USE THIS POLARIZED AC PLUG WITH AN EXTENSION CORD, RECEPTACLE OR OTHER OUTLET UNLESS THE BLADES CAN BE FULLY INSERTED TO PREVENT BLADE EXPOSURE.

NOTICE FOR THE CUSTOMERS IN THE UNITED KINGDOM

A moulded plug complying with BS 1363 is fitted to this equipment for your safety and convenience.

Should the fuse in the plug supplied need to be replaced, a 5 AMP fuse approved by ASTA or BSI to BS 1362, (i.e. marked with

or mark) must be used.

If the plug supp lied with this eq uipment has a detachable fuse cover, be sure to attach the fuse cover after you change the fuse. Never use the plug without the fuse cover. If you should lose the fuse cover, please contact your nearest Sony service station.

For the Customers in Germany

Directive:EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.92/

31/EEC This equipment complies with the EMC regulations when used under the following circumstances:

•

Residential area

•

Business district

•

Light-industry district (This equipment complies with the EMC standard regulations EN55022 Class B.)

Attention

The electromagnetic fields at the specific frequencies may influence the pictu re a nd sound of this camera.

“Memory Stick”

N50

For the Customers in CANADA

This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

For the Customers in the U.S.A.

Be sure to read the following before using your camera

Trial recording

Before you record one-time events, you may want to make a trial recording to make sure that the camera is working correctly.

No compensation for contents of the recording

Contents of the recording cannot be compensated for if recording or playback is not possible due to a malfunction of your camera, etc.

Notes on image data compatibility

•

This camera conforms with the Design Rules for Camera File Systems universal standard established by the JEIDA (J a pan Electronic Industries Devel o pm ent Association). You cannot play back on your camera still images recorded on other equipment (DCR-TRV890E/TRV900/ TRV900E, DSC-D700, DSC-D770) that does not conform with this universal standard. (These models are not sold in some areas.)

•

Playback of images recorded with your camera on other equipment and playback of images recorded or edited with other equipment on your camera are not guaranteed.

Precaution on copyright

Television programs, films, video tapes, and other materials may be copyrighted. Unauthorized recording of such materials may be contrary to the provision of the copyright laws.

Do not shake or strike the camera

In addition to malfunctions and inability to record images, this ma y render the “Memory Stick” unusable or image data breakdown, damage or loss may occur.

LCD screen and lens

•

The LCD screen is manufactured using high-precision technology. However, there may be some tiny black points and/or bright points (red, blue or green in color) that constantly appear on the LCD screen. These points are normal in the manufacturing process and do not affect the recording in any way. Over 99.99% of the pixels are operational for effective use.

•

Be careful when placing the camera near a window or outdoors. Exposing the LCD screen or the lens to direct sunlig ht for long periods may cause malfunctions.

Do not get the camera wet

When taking pictures outdoors in the rain or under similar conditions, be careful not to get the camera wet. If moisture condensation occurs, refer to page 55 and follow the instructions on how to remove it before using the camera.

Back up recommendation

To avoid the potential risk of data loss, always copy (back up) data to a disk.

About the Carl Zeiss lens

This camera is equipp ed with a Carl Z eiss lens which is capable of reproducing fine images. The lens for this camera uses the MTF* measurement system for cameras developed jointly by Carl Zeiss, in Germany, and Sony Corporation, and offers the same quality as other Carl Zeiss lenses.

MTF is the abbreviation of Modulation

∗

Transfer Function/Factor, a numeric value indicating the ability to reproduce the subject contrast.

Getting started

Identifying the parts

See the pages in parent hes es for details of operation.

1 2

3 4

A Built-in microphone

Do not touch while recording.

B Self-timer/Recording lamp C MODE selector (30) D Shutter button (16) (21) E Flash (19) F Focus ring (40) G Lens H Photocell window for flash

Do not block while recording.

I A/V OUT jack (49)

Audio output is monaural.

J DIGITAL I/O (USB) jac k (26) (27) K OPEN (flash) switch (19) L SPOT METER button (42)

M (one-push white balance)

N WHT BAL (white balance)

O MACRO button (40) P FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL switch

qa qs

qd qf qg qh

button (43)

(40)

1-1

Page 8

Getting started

4 5 6

A Zoom lever B POWER switch

POWER lamp

C LCD screen D LCD BACK LIGHT switch

Usually set to ON. Set to OFF to save the battery if you use your camera in bright place.

E PROGRAM AE ADJ button

VOLUME +/– button

F PROGRAM AE button (41) G Battery eject lever (11)

0 qa

qs qd

qf qg

H Access lamp (15) I Battery/“Memory Stick” cover

J (flash) button

Flash lamp

K OPEN switch L Slot cover for AC power

adaptor/charger (12)

M (External flash) jack N DISPLAY button O Control button

A Speaker B Hook for the wrist/shoulder

strap

C Tripod receptacle (bottom

surface)

Use a tripod with a screw length of less than 9/32 inch (6.5 mm). You will be unable to firmly secure the camera to tripods having longer screws, and may damage the camera.

Attaching the lens cap (supplied) and the wrist strap (supplied).

Lens cap

Lens cap strap

D Hook for the lens cap/shoulder

strap

Be sure to remove the lens cap before turning on your camera.

Wrist strap

Preparing the power supply

Charging the battery pack

Your camera operates only with the “InfoLITHIUM” NP-FS11 battery pac k* (S series). You cannot use any other battery pack.

Battery pack (S series)

CHARGE lamp

(orange)

AC-VF10 AC power adaptor/charger (supplied)

Connect the AC power adaptor/charger and the wall outlet (mains).

Insert the battery pack in the direction of the v mark. Slide the

battery pack in the direction of the arrow.

The CHARGE lamp lights up when charging begins. When the CHARGE lamp

normal charge

goes off, use the battery longer than usual, leave the battery pack inserted for about one hour after normal charge is completed.

is completed. For

To remove the battery pack

Slide the battery pack in the direction opposite the v mark.

What is “InfoLITHIUM”?

“InfoLITHIUM” is a lithium ion battery pack which can exchange information such as battery consumption with compatible vide o equipment. This unit is compatible with the “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (S series). “InfoLITHIUM” S series battery pac ks have the

mark. “InfoLITHIUM” is a trademark of Sony Corporation.

full charge

To the wall outlet (mains)

, which allows you to

Getting started

Charging time

Battery pack Full charge (min.) Normal charge (min.)

NP-FS11 (supplied) 170 110

Approximate time to charge a completely discharged battery pack using the ACVF10 AC power adaptor/charger.

Battery life and number of images that can be recorded/played back

STILL mode recording*

LCD BACK LIGHT Battery life (min.) Number of im ages

ON 70 (65) 1300 (1200)

OFF 85 (75) 1600 (1400)

STILL mode playback**

LCD BACK LIGHT Battery life (min.) Number of im ages

ON 110 (100) 2200 (2000)

OFF 145 (130) 2900 (2600)

Approximate battery life and number of images that can be r ecorded/played back with a fully charged battery pack at a temperature of 77°F (25°C), 640×480 image size and in NORMAL recording mode. Numbers in parentheses indicate the time when you use a normally charged battery pack.

Recording at about 4-second intervals

∗

Playing back single images in order at about 3-sec ond intervals

∗∗

MOVIE mode recordi ng

LCD BACK LIGHT Continuous recording time (min.)

ON 75 (65)

OFF 85 (75)

Approximate time that can be recorded with a fully charged battery pack at a temperature of 77°F (2 5 °C) and 160×112 image size. Numbers in parentheses indicate the time when yo u use a normally charged battery pack.

Notes

•

The battery life and number of images will be decrease d if you use your camera at low temperatures, use the flash, repeatedly turn the power on/off or use the zoom.

•

The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is limited. The above figures are a guide when you continuously record/play back while replacing the “Memory Stick.”

•

If sufficient battery remaining time is in dic ated but the power runs out soon, fully charge the battery so that the correct battery remaining time appears.

•

Do not expose the battery pack to water.

1-2

Page 9

Installing the battery pack

Battery eject lever

Battery pack (S series)

Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.

Open the cover while sliding the OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow.

Install the battery pack.

Insert the battery pa ck with the v mark facing toward the battery compartment as illustrated.

Close the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.

To remove the battery pack

Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover. Slide the battery eject lever upward, and remove the battery pack.

Be careful not to drop the battery pack when removing it.

Battery remaining indicator

The LCD screen on the camera shows the remaining time for which you can still record or play back images. This indication may not be ent i re ly accurate depending on the condi t io ns of use and the operating environment.

Auto power-off function

If you do not operate the camera for abou t three mi nutes dur ing recor ding, the camera turns off automaticall y to prevent wearing down the battery. To use the camera again, slide the POWER switch to turn o n th e camera again.

Getting started

Using the AC power adaptor

DK-115 DC connecting cable (supplied)

Slot cover for AC power

adaptor/charger

AC-VF10 AC power adaptor/ charger (supplied)

Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.

Insert the one end of the DK-115 DC conn ect i ng cable to the

battery terminal, and close the cover.

When inserting the cable, open the slot cover for AC power adaptor/charger and be careful not to pinch the cable .

Connect the other end of the DC connecting cable to the AC power

adaptor/charger. Connect the power cord (mains lead) to the AC power adaptor/

charger and then to a wall outlet (mains).

Using a car battery

Use Sony DC adaptor/charger (not supplied).

Power cord (mains lead)

Setting the date and time

When you first use your camera, set the date and time. If these are not set, the CLOCK SET screen appears whenever you turn on your camera for recording.

Control button

Slide the POWER switch in the direction of the arrow to turn on the

power.

The POWER lamp lights up.

Press v on the control button.

The menu bar appears on the L C D screen.

Select [SETUP] with B on the control button,

then press the cen t er z.

Getting started

Select [CLOCK SET] with v/V on the control button, then press the

center z.

Select the desired date display format with

on the control button, then press the

v/V

center z.

Select from [Y/M/D] (year/month/day), [M/D/Y] (month/day/year) or [ D /M / Y ] (day/month/year).

Select the year, month, day, hour or minute

item you want to set with b/B on the control button.

The item to be set is indicated with v/V.

Set the numeric value with v/V on the control button, then press

the center z to enter it.

After entering the number, v/V moves to the next item. If you selected [D/M/Y] in step 5, set the time on a 24-hour cycle.

Select [ENTER] with B on the control button,

then press the center z at the desired moment to begin clock movement.

The date and time are entered.

To cancel the date and time setting

Select [CANCEL] with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z.

1-3

Page 10

Inserting the “Memory Stick”

Access lamp

“Memory Stick”

Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.

Open the cover while sliding the OPEN switch in the direction of the arrow.

Insert the “Memory Stick.”

Insert the “Memory Stick” with the B mark facing toward the battery compartment as illustrated until it clicks.

Close the battery/“Memory Stick” cover.

Removing the “Memory Stick”

Open the battery/“Memory Stick” cov er, then press the “Memory Stick” once lightly.

Notes

•

Insert the “Memory Stick” firmly until it clicks, otherwise a message such as “MEMORY STICK ERROR” will be displayed.

•

Never remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the power while the access lamp is lit up.

•

You cannot record or edit images on a “Memory Stick” if the erasure prevention switch is set to the LOCK position.

Connector

Erasure prevention switch

Label space

Getting started

Basic operations

Recording

Recording still images

Still images are recorded in JPEG format. To record still images, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power and insert a “Memory Stick.”

POWER switch

Set the MODE selector to STILL.

Press and hold the shutter button halfway

down and check the image.

While the AE lock indicator z (green) is flashing, the image freezes momentarily, but is not yet recorded. When the camera finishes the automatic adjustments*, the AE lock indicator z lights up and the camera is ready for recording. To cancel the recording, release the shutter button.

Press the shutter button fully down.

The shutter sounds and th e i m age is recorded on the “Memory Stick.” When “RECORDING” disappears, you can record the next image.

Exposure and focus are automatically adjusted.

∗

The number of images you can record on a “Memory Stick”

See pages 37 to 39.

Notes

•

While the image is being recorded on the “Memory Stick,” do not shake or strike the camera. Also, do not turn the power off, or remove the battery pack or “Memory Stick.”

•

When recording a bright subject , the LC D screen co lor may chang e af ter AE lo ck, b ut thi s does not affect the recorded imag e.

Remaining memory

capacity indicator

AE lock indicator

Checking the last recorded image (Quick Review)

You can check the last recorded image by clearing the menu bar from the screen (page 32) and pressing b on the control button. To return to the normal re cor di ng mode, press lightly on the shutter button or select [RETURN] with b/B on the control button and then press th e center z. You can also delete the image first by selecting [DELETE] on the Quick Review screen with b/B on the control b u tto n a nd pressing the center z, and then selecting [OK] with v/V on the control button and pressing the center z.

Using the zoom feature

Zoom lever

W side: for wide-angle (subject appears farther away)

T side: for telephoto (subject appears closer)

Minimum focal distance to the subject

W side: About 9 7/8 inches (25 cm) or more T side: About 31 1/2 inches (80 cm) or more To record even closer subjects, see page 40.

Digital zoom function

This camera has a digital zoom function. Digital zoom enlarges the image by digital processing and it starts to function when zoom exceeds 5×.

The T side of the bar shows the digital zooming zone.

Using digital zoom

•

The maximum zoom magnification is 10×.

•

Digital zooming dete ri or at es the picture quality. When digital zoom is not necessary, set [DIGITA L ZOOM] to [OFF] in the menu settings (page 35).

Note

Digital zoom does not work for moving images.

Recording

Changing the lens orientation

You can adjust the angle b y turning the lens part upward up to 90 degrees and downward up to 50 degrees.

MODE selector

90°

50°

Lens part

LCD screen indicators during recording

Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 65 for a detailed description of the indicated items.

DISPLAY

Notes

•

You cannot turn off the self-timer indicators and some of the indicators used in advanced operations.

•

The indicators on the LCD screen are not recorded.

1-4

Page 11

Using the self-timer

When you use the self-timer function, the subject is recorded about 10 seconds after you press the shutte r butt on.

Shutter button

Self-timer lamp

Control button

Select (self-timer) indicator on the LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z. The (self-timer) ind i cat or appears on the LCD screen, and about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button , th e subject is recorded. The self-timer lamp flashes after you press the shutter button until the shutter is released.

Recording images with the flash

Slide OPEN switch to make the flash avai lable . The fla sh po p s up. The initial setting is auto (no indicator). In this mode, the flash automatically strobes when the surroundings become dark. When you change the flash mode, press the (flash) repeatedly so that the flash mode indicator appears on th e L CD sc reen. You can only change the flash mode wh ile the flash is popped up.

Flash emitter

(

flash)

OPEN switch

Photocell window for

Each time you press the (flash), the indicator changes as follows.

(No indicator) t t t t (No indicator)

Auto red-eye reduction: The flash strobes before recording to reduce the

Forced flash: The flash strobes regardles s of the surrounding

No flash: The flash does not strobe. You can change the brightness of the flash (FLASH LEVEL) i n t he menu settings (page 35).

red-eye phenomenon.

brightness.

flash

Recording

Notes

•

The recommended shooting distance using the built-in flash is 31/32 feet to 8 1/3 feet (0.3 m to

2.5 m).

•

Attaching a conversion lens (not supplied) may block the light from the flash or cause the len s shadow to appear.

•

You cannot use an external flash and the built-in flash at the same time.

•

If the flash is closed when it should be used, the (no-flash) indicator appears in the LCD screen.

•

Auto red-eye reduction may not produce the desired red-eye reduction e ffects dependi ng on individual differences, the distance to th e subject, if the subject does not see th e pr e-strobe, or other conditions. In addition, red-eye reduction e ffects are also difficult to obtain if you se t the shutter to a slow speed in the PROGRAM AE shutter pr ior ity mode.

•

The flash effect is not obtained easily when you use forced flash in a bright loc ation.

Recording moving images

Moving images with audio are recorded in MPEG format. To record moving images, slide the POWER switch to the right to turn on the power and insert a “Memory Stick.”

POWER switch

DISPLAY

Set the MODE selector to MOVIE.

Press the shutter button fully down.

“REC” appears on the LCD screen, and the image and sound are recorded on the “Memory Stick.”

If you press the shutter button momentarily

The image and sound are recorded for five seconds. Yo u can change the recording time to 10 or 15 seconds with [REC TIME SET] in the menu se ttings (page 37).

If you hold the shutter button down

The image and sound are recor ded while the shutter button is held down for up to 60 seconds. However, when [IMAGE SIZE] in the menu setting is set to [320 (HQ)]/[320×240], the maximum recording time is 15 seconds (page 37).

Zooming or using the self-timer, etc.

See pages 17 to 19.

LCD screen indicators during recording

Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. These indicators are not recorded. See page 65 for a detailed description of the indicators.

Recording

Playback

Playing back still images

POWER switch

DISPLAY

Set the MODE selector to PLAY.

The last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LC D screen.

Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD

screen. Select the desired still image with the

control button.

Press v/V/b/B on the control button to select "b/B" on the LCD screen, then press b/B on the control button.

: To display the preceding image.

: To display the next image.

When the m enu bar is no t displayed

You can directly select and play back the image with b/B on the control button.

Notes

•

You might not be able to correctly pl ay b a ck images recorded w ith this camera on other equipment.

•

You cannot play back on this camera images larger than the maximum image size that can be recorded with this camera.

LCD screen indicators during still image playback

Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 66 for a detailed description of the indicators.

1-5

Page 12

Playing back moving images

(playback)/

)

POWER switch

VOLUME +/–

Set the MODE selector to PLA Y.

The last recorded image (still or moving) appears on the LCD screen.

Press v on the control button to display the menu bar on the LCD

screen. Select the desired moving image with the

control button.

Moving images are display ed one-size smaller than still images. Press v/V/b/B on the control button to sel ect "b/B" on the LCD screen, then pr ess b/B on the control button.

: To display the preceding image.

: To display the next image.

Select

(playback) on the LCD screen with

on the control button, then press the

v/V/b/B

center z.

The moving image and sound are played back. During playback, B (playback) changes to X (pause).

DISPLAY

(pause

Playback bar

When the menu bar is not displayed

You can directly select the image w it h b/B on the control button, and play back the image and sound by pressing the center z. When you press the center z during playback, playback is pa us ed.

Moving images recorded with the image of [320 (HQ)]

The images are displayed over the entire screen in steps 3 and 4.

Adjusting the volume

Press VOLUME +/– to adjust the volume.

Playback

LCD screen indicators during moving image playback

Press DISPLAY to turn on/off the indicators on the LCD screen. See page 66 for a detailed description of the indicators.

To pause playback

Select X (pause) on the LCD screen with v/V/b/B on the control button, then press the center z.

Viewing images using a personal computer

You can view data recorded with your camera on a personal computer and attach it to e-mail. This section describes the method for installing the USB driver and viewing images on a personal com puter. Be sure to also see the operation manua ls for your personal computer and application software.

Note

Data recorded with your camera is stored in the following formats. Make sure that applications that support these file formats are installed on your personal computer.

•

Still images (other than TEXT and uncompressed modes): JPEG format

•

Moving images/audio: MPEG format

•

Uncompressed mode still images: TIFF format

•

TEXT mode: GIF format

Recommended computer en vironment

Recommended Windows environment

OS: Microsoft Windows98, Windows 98SE

Standard installation is required. Operation is not assured in an environment upgraded from: Windows 3.1, Windows 95 to Windows98 or

Windows 98 to Windows 98SE. CPU: MMX Pentium 200 MHz or faster The USB connector must be provided as standard. ActiveMovie Player (DirectShow) must be installed (to play back moving pictures).

Recommended Macintosh environment

Macintosh computer with the Mac OS 8.5.1/8.6/9.0 standard installation However, note that the update to Mac OS 9.0 should be used for the following models.

•

iMac with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation and a slot loading type CD-ROM drive

•

iBook or G4 with the Mac OS 8.6 standard installation The USB connector must be provided as standard. QuickTime 3.2 or newer must be installed (to play back moving pictures).

Notes

•

Operations are not guaranteed for either the Windows or Macintosh environment if you connect two or more USB equipment to a single personal computer at the same time (except for the USB keyboard and mouse which are provided as standard), or when using a hub.

•

Depending on the type of USB equipment that is used simultaneously, some equipment may not operate.

•

Operations are not guaranteed for all the recommended computer environments menti o n ed above.

Installing the USB driver

Before connecting your camera to your personal computer, install the USB driver to the computer. The USB driver is contained together with application software for viewing images on a CD-ROM which is supplied with your camera.

For Windows 98 users

Turn on your personal computer and allow Windows98 to load.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your personal

computer.

Playback

Connect the USB jack on your camera with the USB connector on

your personal computer using the supplied USB cable.

to the USB connector

Personal computer

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camera, connect the AC power

adaptor/charger and turn on your camera.

“PC MODE” appears on the LCD screen of your camera and the camer a i s set to communication standby mode. Your personal computer recognizes the camera, and the Windows 98 A d d Hardware Wizard starts.

Follow the on-screen messages to specify the CD-ROM drive and

install the USB driver.

The Add Hardware Wizard starts tw ic e because two different USB drivers are installed. Be sure to allow the installation to complete without interrupting it.

Note

Be sure to insert a “Memory Stick” into your camera before installing the USB driver. Otherwise, you will be unable to install the USB driver.

For Macintosh users

Turn on your personal computer and allow the Mac OS to load.

Insert the supplied CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive of your personal

computer.

USB cable

to the USB ja ck

Push in until the connector clicks into place

1-6

Page 13

Double-click the CD-ROM drive icon to open the window.

Double-click the icon of the hard disk containing the OS to open

the window. Move the following two files from the window opened in step 3 to

the “System Folder” icon in the window opened in step 4 (drag and drop) .

•

Sony USB Driver

•

Sony USB Shim

When “Put these items into the Exte nsions folder?” appears, click

“OK.” Restart your personal computer.

Viewing images

For Windows 98 users

Turn on the power of your personal computer and allow

Windows 98 to load. Connect one end of the USB cable to the USB jack on the camera

and the other end to the USB connector on your personal computer.

to the USB connector

Personal computer

Insert a “Memory Stick” into your camera, and connect the AC

power adaptor/charger to your camera and then to a wa ll out le t (mains).

T ur n on the power of your camera.

“PC MODE” appears on th e LCD screen of the camera.

Open “My Computer” on Windows 98 and double click the newly

recognized drive. (Example: “Removable Disk (D:)”)

The folders inside the “Memory Stick” are displayed.

USB cable

to the USB ja ck

Push in until the connector clicks into place

Select and double-click the desired image/sound file from the

folder.

For the detailed folder and file name, see “Image file storage dest inations and image files” (page 29).

Desired file type Double-click in this order

Still image “Dcim” folder t “100msdcf” folder t Image file Moving image* “Mssony” folder t “Moml0001” folder t Image file* Audio* “Mssony” folder t “Momlv100” fol d er t Audio file* E-mail image

TIFF image

Playback

(uncompressed)

Copying a file to the hard disk of your personal computer before viewing it is

∗

recommended. If you play back the file directly from the “M e mor y S tic k”, the image and sound may break off.

“Mssony” folder t “Imcif100” folder t Image file

Notes on using your personal computer

“Memory Stick”

•

“Memory Stick” operations on your camera cannot be assur e d if the “Memory Stick” has been formatted on your personal computer.

•

Do not optimize the “Mem or y St ic k” on a Windows machine. This will shorten the “Memory Stick” life.

•

Do not compress the data on the “Memory Stick.” Co mpr e ssed files cannot be played back on your camera.

Software

•

Depending on your application software, the file size may increase when you open a still image file.

•

When you load an image modified using the supplied retouch software from your personal computer to the camera or when you directly modify the image on the camera, the image format will differ so the “FILE ERROR” message may appear and you may be unable to ope n the file.

Communications with yo ur personal computer

Communications between your camera and your personal computer may not recover after recovering from Suspend, Resume, or Sleep.

•

Windows and ActiveMovie, DirectShow are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United Sta te s and/or other countries.

•

Macintosh and Mac OS, QuickTime are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.

•

All other product names mentioned herein may be the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Furthermore, “™” and “®” are not mentioned in each case in this manual.

Image file storage destinations and image files

Image files recorded with y our camera are grouped in folder s by recording mode. The meanings of the file names are as follows. within the range from 0001 to 9999.

For Windows 98 users (The drive recognizing the camera is “D.”)

Folder containing stil l image data

Folder containing E-MAIL mode and TIFF mode image data

Folder containing movi ng image data

Folder containing VOICE mode audio data

Folder File Meaning

100msdcf DSC0

TXT0

Imcif100 DSC0

DSC0

Moml0001 MOV0 Momlv100 DSC0

The numerical portions of the following files are the s ame. — A small-size image file recorded in E-MAIL mode and its corresponding image file — An unc ompressed image file recorded in TIFF mode and its corresponding image file — A n au dio file rec or de d in VOICE mode and its cor responding image file

.JPG•Still image file recorded normally

ssss

•

.GIF•Still image file recorded in TEXT mode

.JPG•Small-size image file recorded in E-

.TIF•Uncompressed image file recorded in

.MPG•Moving image file recorded norma lly

.MPG•Audio file recorded in VOICE mode

stands for any number

ssss

Still image file recorded in E-MAIL mode (page 38) Still image file recorded in TIFF mode (page 39) Still image file recorded in VOICE mode (page 38)

(page 39)

MAIL mode (page 38)

TIFF mode (page 39)

(page 38)

Advanced operations

Before performing advanced operations

This section describes the basic control methods that are frequently used for “Advanced operations”.

How to use the MODE selector

The MODE selector selects whether you can use yo ur camera to record or to play

Playback

back and edit images. Se t the selector as follows before starting t o operate your camera.

PLAY STILL MOVIE

PLAY: To play back or edit images STILL: To record still images and

voice memos

MOVIE: To record moving images

How to use the control button

The control button is used to select the indicators, images and menus appearing on the LCD screen of your camer a. The operation methods that are frequently used for “Advanced operations” are described below.

Select Enter (OK)

1-7

Page 14

Turning on/off the operation buttons (menu bar) on the LCD screen

Press v to display the menu bar on the LCD screen.

How to change the menu settings

Some of the advanced operations for your camera are executed by selecting menu items displayed on the LCD screen with the control button.

Press V to clear the menu bar from the LCD screen.

Note

You cannot clear the menu bar during INDEX screen display (page 46).

Selecting items and images on the LCD screen

Press v/V/b/B on the

control button to select the item you want to set or the image you want to display.

The color of the selected item or the border of the selected image changes from blue to yellow.

Press the center z to enter

the item.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 to execute each function.

The “Advanced operations” section of this manual refers to selecting and entering items by the above procedure as “Select [(item name)].”

Menu bar

MODE selector

Before performing advanced operations

Press v on the control button to display the menu bar.

The menu bar appears as follows according to the setting of the MODE selector.

MOVIE/STILL PLAY (single mode) PLAY (INDEX mode)

Select the desired item with v/V/b/B on the

control button, then press the center z.

The color of the selected item changes from blue to yellow, and when you press the center z, the modes that can be set for that item are displayed.

Select the desired mode with v/V/b/B on the control butto n , then

press the center z.

To clear the menu

Press V on the control butto n un til the LCD screen returns to the me nu bar display in step 1. To clear the menu bar, press V again.

Menu settings

Menu items that can be modi fied differ depe ndi ng on the setting of the MODE selector. The LCD screen shows only the items you can operate at the moment. Initial settings are indicated wi th x.

(SELF TIMER)

Records with the self-timer (page19).

EFFECT

Item Setting Description MODE

P.EFFECT SOLARIZE

DATE/ TIME

FILE

FORMAT OK Formats a “Memory Stick.” MOVIE

POS. SENSOR

FILE NUMBER

B&W SEPIA NEG.ART OFF

DAY&TIME DATE OFF

Item Setting Description MODE

CANCEL Cancels formatting of a “Memory

ON Plays back images recorded with the

OFF When this camera may be subject to

SERIES Assigns numbers to files in sequence

NORMAL Resets the file numbering each time the

Sets the image special effects (page 45). MOVIE

Sets whether to insert the date and time into the image (page 44).

Stick.”

camera on its side (vertical images) as horizontal images. This function does not work for images recorded in TEXT mode.

vibration such as when you record images from inside a moving car, set this to OFF to prevent improper horizontal/vertical judgement.

even if the “Memory Stick” is changed.

“Memory Stick” is changed.

selector

STILL

selector

STILL PLAY

STILL

MOVIE STILL

Item Setting Description MODE

IMAGE SIZE

REC MODE TIFF Records a TIFF (uncompressed) file in

Before performing advanced operations

REC TIME SET

ROTA TE (in single mode only)

SLIDE SHOW (in single mode only)

PRINT MARK

PROTECT ON Protects images against accident al

2240×1680

1856×1392 1856 (3:2) 1280×960 640×480

320 (HQ) 320×240 160×112

TEXT Records a GIF file in black-and- w hi t e. VOICE Records an audio file (with still image)

E-MAIL Records a small-size (320×240) JPEG

NORMAL Records a JPEG file in the selected

15 sec 10 sec 5sec

INTERVAL

REPEAT Repeats the slide show.

START Starts the slide show. CANCEL Cancels the slide show settings and

ON Marks the still images to be printed

OFF Unmarks the print mark of the still

OFF Releases protection of images against

Selects the image size when recording still images.

Selects the MPEG image size when recording moving images.

addition to the JPEG file.

in addition to the JPEG file.

file in addition to the selected image size.

image size. Adjusts the recording time for moving

images.

Rotates the still image. PLAY

—

Sets the slide show interval.

3 sec/5 sec/10 sec/30 sec/1 min

ON/OFF

execution.

(page 54).

images.

erasure (page 50).

accidental erasure.

selector

STILL

MOVIE

STILL

MOVIE

PLAY

1-8

Page 15

CAMERA

Item Setting Description MODE

DIGITAL ZOOM

SHARPNESS

FLASH LEVEL

EXPOSURE +2.0 EV to

TOOL

COPY OK Copies an image (page 52). PLAY

RESIZE (in single mode only)

SETUP

DEMO

ON Uses digital zoom. STILL

OFF Does not use digital zoom.

+2 to –2 Adjusts the sharpness of the image.

HIGH Makes the flash level higher than

NORMAL Normal setting.

LOW Makes the flash level l ower than normal.

–2.0 EV

Item Setting Description MODE

CANCEL Cancels copying of the image.

2240×1680 1856×1392 1280×960 640×480 CANCEL

Item Setting Description MODE

ON/STBY

OFF

appears on the LCD screen except

when set to 0.

normal.

Adjusts the exposure. MOVIE

Changes the recorded still image size (page 52).

Displayed only when you us e t he AC power adaptor in MOVIE or STILL mode. When ON is selected, a demonstration will start if you do not operate your camera for about 10 minutes. To stop the demonstration, turn off your camera. Selec t ON to make the demonstration appear again.

STILL

PLAY

MOVIE STILL

selector

Item Setting Description MODE

VIDEO OUT

LANGUAGE

CLOCK SET

BEEP SHUTTER Turns off the beep only. (The shutter

Before performing advanced operations

LCD BRIGHT

INDEX*

Displays six images at a time (PLAY (INDEX) mode) (page 46).

DELETE

OK Deletes the displayed image. PLAY CANCEL Cancel s deleting of the image.

(RETURN)**

Returns to PLAY (single) mode.

Displayed only in PLAY (single) mode.

∗

Displayed only in PLAY (INDEX) mode.

∗∗

NTSC Sets the video output signal to NTSC

PAL Sets the video output signal to PAL

ENGLISH Displays the menu items in English. MOVIE

ON Turns on the beep/shutter sound (when

OFF Turns off the beep/shutter sound.

Setting Description MODE selector

mode (North American countries, Japan, etc.).

mode (European countries, etc.).

/JPN Displays the menu items in Japanese.

Sets the date and time (page 13). MOVIE

—

sound is heard when you press the shutter button.)

you press the control button/ button).

Adjusts the LCD screen brightness using the +/– buttons on the LCD screen. This has no effect on the recorded images.

shutter

selector

MOVIE STILL PLAY

STILL PLAY

MOVIE STILL PLAY

Various recording

Setting the image size (IMAGE SIZE)

2,3

Set the MODE selector to MOVIE or STILL.

Select [FILE] and then [IMAGE SIZE] from the menu.

Select the desired image size.

Still image sizes

2240×1680, 1856×1392, 1856 (3:2)*, 1280×960, 640×480

The image is recorded in 3:2 size to

∗

match the printing paper size ratio of 3:2.

Moving image sizes

320 (HQ*), 320×240, 160×112

High Quality mode

∗

The number of images or the time that you can record on a “Memory Stick” (8 MB):

Image size Number of images or

2240×1680 Approx. 4 1856×1392 Approx. 6

1856 (3:2) Approx. 6

1280×960 Approx. 12

640×480 Approx. 118

320 (HQ) Approx. 20 (15**) sec.

320×240 Approx. 85 (15**) sec. 160×112 Approx. 345 (60**) sec.

When [REC MODE] is set to

∗

[NORMAL]. Numbers in parentheses indicate the

∗∗

maximum recording time during continuous recording.

time*

Various recording

Recording still images for e-mail (EMAIL)

E-MAIL mode records a small-size (320×240) image at the same time as a still image. Small-size images are convenient for e -mail t rans missio n, etc .

Set the MODE selector to STILL.

Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and then [E-MAIL] from the menu.

Record the image.

The number of images that you can record on a “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in E-MAIL mode:

Image size Number of images

2240×1680 Approx. 4 1856×1392 Approx. 5 1856 (3:2) Approx. 5

1280×960 Approx. 12

640×480 Approx. 95

To return to normal recording mode

Select [NORMAL] in step 2.

Adding audio files to still images (VOICE)

1 3

Set the MODE selector to STILL.

Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and then [VOICE] from the menu.

Record the image.

If you press and release the shutter button, sound is recorded for 5 seconds.

If you hold down the shutter button, sound is recorded until you release the shutter button for up to 40 seconds.

The number of images that you can record on a “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in VOICE mode (when recording sound for five seconds):

Image size Number of images

2240×1680 Approx. 4 1856×1392 Approx. 5

1856 (3:2) Approx. 5

1280×960 Approx. 11

640×480 Approx. 56

To return to normal recording mode

Select [NORMAL] in step 2.

1-9

Page 16

Recording text documents (TEXT)

Text is recorded in black and wh i te GIF format to provide a clearer image.

1 3

Set the MODE selector to STILL.

Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and then [TEXT] from the menu.

Record the image.

The number of images that you can record on a “Memory Stick” (8 MB) in TEXT mode:

Image size N umber of images

2240×1680 Ap prox. 10 to 110 1856×1392 Ap prox. 20 to 140

1856 (3:2) Approx. 20 to 160 1280×960 Approx. 40 to 228

640×480 Approx. 160 to 727

To return to normal recording mode

Select [NORMAL] in step 2.

Notes

•

If the subject is not evenly illuminated, you may be unable to record a clear image.

•

Writing and reading data takes mor e ti me than in normal recording.

Recording uncompressed images (TIFF)

This mode simultaneously records still images in both TIFF format (uncompressed) and JPEG format (compressed).

1 3

Set the MODE selector to STILL.

Select [FILE], [REC MODE], and then [TIF F] from the menu.

Record the image.

The number of images that you can record on a “Memory Stick” (16 MB) in TI FF m ode:

Image size Number of images

1856×1392 Approx. 1

1856 (3:2) Approx. 1

To return to normal recording mode

Select [NORMAL] in step 2.

Notes

•

JPEG images are recorded in the image size selected by the [IMAGE SIZE] menu. TIFF images are recorded in [1856×1392] size other than when [1856 (3:2)] is selected.

•

Writing data takes more time than in normal recording.

•

The supplied “Memory Stick” (8 MB) does not have sufficient capacity to r eco r d uncompressed images.

Various recording

Recording images in macro

3 1

3 2

Set the MODE selector to MOVI E or STILL.

Set FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL to AUTO.

Set the zoom to W side and then press MACRO.

The (macro) indicator appears on the LCD screen. You can shoot a subject that is about 13/16 inches (2 cm) away from the lens surface in macro mode.

To return to normal recording mode

Press MACRO again. disappears from the LCD screen.

Notes

•

Y ou cannot record images in macro with the following PROGRAM AE modes. — L and sc ap e m ode — Panfocus mode

•

You cannot record images in macro when

appears on the LCD screen.

•

When you shoot a subject that is about 13/16 inches (2cm) away from the lens surface, the edges of the LCD screen image may appear distorted.

Focusing manually

Normally the focus is automatically adjusted. This function is useful when the auto focus does not work well such as in dark places.

Set the MODE selector to MOVIE or STILL.

Set FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL to MANUAL.

The 9 (manual focus) indicator appears on the LCD screen.

Turn the focus ring to achieve a sharp focus.

When recording still images, the LCD screen image is zoomed to 2×* and the focus mode indicator is displayed. When a sharp focus is achieved, the image returns to normal and the 9 (manual focus) indicator changes from yel l ow to white. When recording moving images, the image is not zoomed.

You can adjust the focus distance from

13/16 inches (

(infinite).

When using digital zoom, the LCD

∗

screen image is zoomed to slightly less than 2x.

To reactivate auto focusing

Set FOCUS AUTO/MANUAL to AUTO.

2cm) to ∞

Notes

•

The focus mode indicator is approximate, and should be used as a reference.

•

The focus mode indicator is not displayed correctly when using a conversion lens.

•

When the zoom lever is set to the T side, your camera may not focus on subjects closer than about 2 5/8 feet (80 cm). In these cases, the focus mode indicator flashes. Move the zoom le ver to ward the W side until the focus mode indica tor stops flashing.

•

You cannot focus manually in PROGRAM AE Panfocus mode.

Using the PROGRAM AE function

1 2

+/–

Set the MODE selector to MOVI E or STILL.

Press PROGRAM AE repeatedly t o select the desired PROGRAM AE mode.

Aperture priority mode

Makes the subject stand out against an unclear background or makes both the subject and the background stand out clearly. Press +/– repeatedly to select an aperture valu e i n 7 st eps from F 2.8 to F8.

Shutter speed priority

mode

Records a sharp picture o f a fas tmoving subject or the flow of motion of a moving subject. Press +/– repeatedly to select a shutter speed in 19 steps from 8” to 1/1000 when recording a still image and in 13 steps from 1/8 to 1/1000 when recording a moving image.

Twilight mode

Suppresses the washed-out color of a bright subject i n a dark place so that you can record the subject without losing the dark atmosphere of the surroundings.

Twilight plus mode

Increases the effectiveness of the twilight mode function.

Various recording

Landscape mode

Focuses only on a distant subject to record landscapes, etc.

Panfocus mode

Changes the focus quickly and simply from a close subject to a distant subject.

To cancel PROGRAM AE

Press PROGRAM AE repeatedly until the indicator on the LCD screen goes out.

Notes

•

You cannot select F2.8 in aperture priority mode when the zoom is set to the T side.

•

You can focus only on distant subjects in Landscape mode.

•

In Panfocus mode, the zoom position and focus are fixed.

•

When you record in the Twilight plus mode, we recommend that you use a tripod to prevent shaking.

•

Set the forced flash when you use the flash in the following modes:

–

Twilight mode

–

Twilight plus mode

–

Landscape mode

•

You cannot use the PROGRAM AE function when [REC MODE] is set to [TEXT].

•

If the setting is not appropriate in a perture priority mode and shutter priority mode, the setting value indicator on the LCD screen flashes when you press the shutter button halfway down. In this case, reset the value.

•

If you set a slow shutter speed in twilight plus mode and shutter speed priority mode, the noise may increase.

Using the spot lightmetering mode

Use this mode when there is backlight or when there is strong contrast between the subject and the background, etc.

Set the MODE selector to MOVIE or STILL.

Press SPOT METER to display the spot lightmetering cross hair.

Position the point you want to record on the spot light-metering cross hair.

LCD screen

Spot light-metering cross hair

1-10

Page 17

Adjusting the exposure (EXPOSURE)

2,3

Set the MODE selector to MOVIE or STILL.

Select [CAMERA] and then [EXPOSURE ] from the menu.

Select the desired exposure value.

Adjust the exposure value while checking the brightness of the background. You can select values ranging from +2.0 EV to –2.0 EV in steps of 1/3EV.

Note

The exposure may not be adjusted properly when the subject is extremely bright or dark, or when using the flash.

Adjusting the white balance (WHITE BALANCE)

Normally the white balance is automatically adjusted.

Set the MODE selector to MOVI E or STILL.

Press WHT B AL repeat edly t o select the desired white balance mode.

One-push white balance ()

Adjusts the white balance depending on the light source

OUT DOOR ( )

Recording a sunrise/sunset, night scene, neon signs, or fireworks

IN DOOR (n)

•

Places where the lighting condition changes quickl y

•

Under bright lighting such as photography studios

•

Under sodium or mercury lamps

AUTO (No indicator)

Adjusts the white balance automatically

Various recording

To set the (One-push white balance) button

1 Press WHT BAL repeat edly until

appears.

2 Place a white object such as paper

under the same light conditions as you are going to record, and record the white object so that it fills the entire frame of your cam era.

3 Press .

The indicator starts to flash quickly. Once the white balance is set, the indicator stops flashing.

To reactivate auto adjustment

Select [AUTO] in step 2.

Notes

•

Select [AUTO] when record i ng und er fluorescent lighting.

•

The indicator means: Slow flashing: white balance is not set. Quick flashing: white balance is being adjusted. Lit steady: white balance has been set .

•

If the indicator keeps flashing even when you press , record in automatic white balance mode.

Recording the date and time on the still image (DATE/TIME)

1 4

2,3

Set the MODE selector to STILL.

Select [EFFECT] and then [DATE/TIME] from the menu.

Select the date and time setting.

DAY&TIME

The date, hour and minutes are imposed onto the image.

DATE

The year, month and day are imposed onto the image.

OFF

The date and time are not imposed onto the image.

Record the image.

The date and time are not displayed during recording. The date and time are di s played when playing back images.

Enjoying picture effects (P.EFFECT)

2,3

Set the MODE selector to MOVIE or STILL.

Select [EFFECT] and then [P.EFFECT] from the menu.

Select the desired mode. SOLARIZE

The light contrast is clearer and the picture looks like an illustration.

B&W

The picture is monochrome (black and white).

SEPIA

The picture is colored like an old picture.

NEG.ART

The color and brightn ess of the picture are reversed.

To cancel picture effect

Select [OFF] in step 3.

Various recording

Various playback

Playing back six images at once (INDEX)

Set the MODE selector to PLAY.

Select [INDEX] on the LCD screen.

Six images are displayed at once (index screen).

This shows the position of the currently displayed images relative to all the recorded images.

The following marks are displayed on each image according to the image type and settings.

: Moving image file : Voice memo file : E-mail file : Print mark

: Protect mark TEXT: Text mark TIFF: TIFF mark (No mark): Normal recording (no settings)

To display the next (previous) index screen

Select v/V at the lower left of t he LCD screen.

Displays the prev ious index screen

To return to n ormal playback (single image)

•

Note

You cannot display images recorded in TEXT mode on the INDEX screen.

Displays the nex t index screen

Select the desired image w i t h the control button. Select [3] (RETURN).

1-11

Page 18

Enlarging a part of the still image (Zoom and trimming)

1 3

2,4

Set the MODE selector to PLAY.

Display the image to be enlarged.

Zoom in/out the image with the zoom lever.

The zoom scaling indica tor appears on the LCD screen.

Press the control button repeatedly to select the desired part of the image .

: The image moves downward

: The image moves upward

: The image moves rightward

: The image moves leftward

To return to the normal size

Zoom out with the zoom leve r until the zoom scaling indicator ( ×1.1) disappears from the screen, or simply press z.

To record an enlarged image (trimming)

1Enlarge the image. 2Press the shutter button. The image

is recorded at 640×480 size, then the display returns to the image display before enlargement.

Notes

•

You cannot trim images recorded in TEXT mode or uncompressed images.

•

The maximum zoom magnification is 5 the original image, re g ard l ess of the image size.

•

The picture quality of trimmed images may deteriorate.

•

The original picture remains e ven after trimming.

•

The trimmed image is re corded as the newest file.

Rotating a still image

(ROTATE)

Playing back the images in order (SLIDE SHOW)

This function is usef ul fo r chec king the recorded images or for presentations, etc.

2,3,4

Set the MODE selector to PLAY.

Display the image to rotate.

Select [FILE] and then [ROTATE] from the menu.

Rotate the image clockwise

or counterclockwise ,

then select [RETURN].

Various playback

Notes

•

Y ou may no t be able to rotate images recorded with other equipment.

•

Also, when viewing images on a personal computer, the image rotation information may not be reflected depending on the application software.

•

You cannot rotate protected or uncompressed images, or images recorded in TEXT mode.

Set the MODE selector to PLAY.

Select [FILE] and then [SLIDE SHOW] from the menu.

Set the following items.

INTERVAL

1 min (one minute), 30 sec (30 seconds), 10 sec (10 seconds), 5 sec (5 seconds) , 3 sec (3 seconds)

REPEAT

ON: Plays back images in a

continuous loop until [RETURN] is selected.

OFF: After all images have been

played back, the slide show ends.

Select [START] with the control button.

The slide show begins.

To cancel the slide show

Select [CANCEL ] in step 2 or 3.

To skip to the next/previous image during slide show playback

Select

at the lower left of the

"b/B"

LCD screen.

2,3

Note

The [INTERVAL] setting time is approximate, and may vary depending on the played back image size or other factors.

Viewing images on a TV screen

Before connecting you r ca mera, be sure to turn off the TV.

Set the TV/VIDEO switch to “VIDE O.”

to A/V OUT jack

A/V connecting

cable (supplied)

Connect the A/V connecting cable to the A/V OUT jack of your camera and to the audio/video input jacks of the TV.

If your TV has stereo type audio input jacks, co nnect the audi o pl ug of the A/V connecting cable to the Lch jack.

Turn on the TV, then start playback on your camera.

The playback image appears on the TV screen.

Note

You cannot use a TV that has an antenna (aerial) connector only.

Editing

The selected images are p ro tected.

Preventing accidental erasure (PROTECT)

The - (protect) indicator ap pears on protected images.

1,2,3

To release protection

If you selected [ALL] in step 2, select [OFF]. If you selected [SELECT] in step 2, select the images to unprotect with the control button, then select [ENTER].

In single mode

Set the MODE selector to PLAY, then disp l ay the image to protect.

Various playback

Select [FILE], [PROTECT], and then [ON] from the menu.

The displayed imag e i s protected and - appears.

To release protection

Select [OFF] in step 2.

In INDEX mode

Set the MODE selector to PLA Y, then display the INDEX screen.

Select [FILE], [PROTECT], and then [ALL] or [SELECT] from the menu.

When you select [ALL]

Select [ON]. All the images recorded in “Memory Stick” are protected.

When you select [SELECT]

Select all the images to prote ct with the control button, then select [ENTER].

1-12

Page 19

Deleting images

1,2

(DELETE)

You cannot delete protected files.

The (delete) indicator appears on the selected images and these images are deleted.

Changing the recorded still image size (RESIZE)

Copying images (COPY)

You can copy images to another “Memory Stick.”

In single mode

1,2,3

In single mode

Set the MODE selector to PLAY, then display the image to delete.

Select [DELETE] and then [OK] from the menu.

The image is deleted.

In INDEX mode

Set the MODE selector to PLAY, then disp la y th e IND EX screen.

Select [DELETE] and then [ALL] or [SELECT] from the menu.

When you select [ALL]

Select [ENTER]. All unprotected images are deleted.

When you select [SELECT]

Select all the images to del et e with the control button, then select [ENTER].

To cancel deleting

Select [CANCEL] in step 2 or 3.

Note

If there are files on the “Memo ry Stick” with names having the same last 4 digits as the file name of the image to be deleted, these files are also deleted at the same time.

Editing

1,2,3

Set the MODE selector to PLAY and display the image to resize.

Select [TOOL] and then [RESIZE] from the menu.

Select the desired image size.

2240×1680, 1856×1392, 1280×960, 640×480 The changed image is recorded, then the display returns to the image display before resizing.

To return to the original size

Select [CANCEL] in step 3.

Notes

•

You cannot change the size of images recorded in TEXT mode or uncompressed images.

•

When you change from a small size to a large size, the picture quality deteriorates.

•

The original image is retained even after resizing.

•

The resized image is recorded as the newest file.

Set the MODE selector to PLAY, then display the image to copy.

Select [TOOL], [COPY], and then [OK] from the menu.

“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears.

When “CHANGE MEMORY STICK” appears, eject the “Memory Stick.”

“INSERT MEMORY STICK” appears.

Insert the “Memory Stick” on which to copy the image.

“RECORDING” appears. When copying is completed, “COMPLETE” appears. To end copying, select [EXIT].

To copy the image to another “Memory Stick”

Select [CONTINUE] and repeat steps

and 4.

In INDEX mode

1,2,3,4

Set the MODE selector to PLAY, then disp la y th e IND EX screen.

Select [TOOL], [COPY], and then [SELEC T] from the menu.

Select the image to copy.

The (select) indicator appears on the image.

Select [ENTER].

“MEMORY STICK ACCESS” appears.

When “CHANGE MEMORY STICK” is disp lay ed, ejec t the “Memory Stick.”

“INSERT MEMORY STICK” appears.

Insert another “Memory Stick.”

“RECORDING” appears. When copying is completed, “COMPLETE” appears. To end co pying, select [EXIT].

To copy the image to another “Memory Stick”

Select [CONTINUE] and repeat steps

and 6.

To cancel copying part-way

Change the MODE selector setting or turn off the power.

Notes

•

You cannot copy uncompressed images.

•

You cannot copy images that are bigger than 5 MB at once. If “NOT ENOUGH MEMORY” appears or flashes on the INDEX screen, cancel some images to copy and try again.

•

After “COMPLETE” appears, if you exchange the “Memory Stick” without selecting “EXIT,” the same image is copied again.

Editing

Selecting still images to print (PRINT MARK)

You can mark a print mark on still images recorded with your camera. This mark is convenient when you have images printed at a shop that conforms with the DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) standard .

1,2,3,4

In single mode

Set the MODE selector to PLAY and display the image you want to print.

Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], and then [ON] from the menu.

The (print) mark is displayed on the image.

To unmark the print mark

Select [OFF] in step 2.

In INDEX mode

Set the MODE selector to PLA Y, then display the INDEX screen.

Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], and then [SELECT] from the menu.

Select the images to mark with the control button.

Select [ENTER].

of the selected i mages change

from green to white .

To unmark selected print marks

Select the image s t o unmark in step 3 with the control button, then select [ENTER].

To unmark all the print marks

Select [FILE], [PRINT MARK], [ALL] and then [OFF] from the menu.

of all images are unmark ed.

Notes

•

You cannot mark moving images or images recorded in TEXT mode.

•

If you mark an image recorded in TIFF mode with a print mark, only the uncompressed image is printed, and the JPEG image recorded at the same time is not printed.

1-13

Page 20

Additional information

Precautions

On cleaning

Cleaning the LCD screen

Wipe the screen surface with a cleaning cloth (not supplied) or a LCD cleaning kit (not supplied) to remove fingerprints, dust, etc.

Cleaning the camera surface

Clean the camera surface with a soft cloth slightly moistened with water, then wipe the surface dry. Do not use any type of solvent such as thinner, alcohol or ben zen e as this may damage the finish or the casing.

After using your camera at the seashore or other dusty locations

Clean your camera carefully. Otherwise, the salty air may corrode the metal fittings or dust may enter the inside of your camera, causing a malfunction.

Note on operating temperature

Your camera is designed for use between the temperatures of 32°F and 104°F (0°C and 40°C). Recording in extremely cold or hot places that exceed this range is not recommended.

On moisture condensation

If the camera is brought directly from a cold to a warm location, or is placed in a very damp room, moisture may condense inside or outside the camera. Sho uld t his occur, the camera will not operate properly.

Moisture condensation occurs easily when:

•

The camera is brought fr om a cold lo catio n such as a ski slope into a warmly heated room.

•

The camera is taken from an airconditioned room or car interior to the hot outdoors, etc.

How to prevent moisture condensation

When bringing the camera from a cold place to a warm place, seal the camera in a plastic bag and allow it to adapt to conditions at the new location over a period of time (about an hour).

If moisture condensation occurs

Turn off the camera and wait about an hour for the moisture to evaporate. No te that if you attempt to record with moi sture remaining inside the lens, you will be unable to record clear images.

On AC power adaptor

•

Unplug the unit from the wall outlet (mains) when you are not using the unit for a long time.

•

To disconnect the po wer cord (m ains lead ), pull it out by the plug. Never pull the power cord (mains lead) itself.

•

Do not operate the unit with a damaged cord or if the unit has been dropped or damaged.

•

Do not bend the power cord (mains lead) forcibly, or pl ace a hea vy obj ect on it . This will damage the cord and may cause fire or electrical shock.

•

Prevent metallic objects from co ming into contact with the metal parts of the connecting section. If this happens, a short may occur and the unit may be damaged.

•

Always keep metal contacts clean.

•

Do not disassemble the unit.

•

Do not apply mechanical shock or drop the unit.

•

While the unit is in use, particularly during charging, keep it away from AM receivers and video equipment. AM reception and video operation are disturbed.

•

The unit becomes warm during use. This is not a malfunction.

•

Do not place the unit in locations that are: —Extremely hot or cold —Dusty or dirty —Very h u m i d —Vibrating

On battery pack

•

Use only the specified charger with the charging function.

•

To prevent accident from a short circuit, do not allow metal objects to come into contact with the battery termin al s.

•

Keep the battery pack away fro m fire.

•

Never expose the battery pack to temperatures above 140°F (60°C), such as in a car parked in the sun or under direct sunlight.

•

Keep the battery pack dry.

•

Do not expose the battery pack to any mechanical shock.

•

Do not disassemble nor modify the battery pack.

•

Install the battery pack to the camera securely.

•

Charging while some capacity remains does not affect the original battery capacity.

If any problem occurs, unplug your camera and contact your nearest Sony dealer.

On internal rechargeable button battery

Additional information

This camera has an internal rechargeable button battery for maintaining the dat e and time and other settings regardless of whether the power is on or off. This rechargeable button battery is constantly charged as long as you are using the camera. However, if you use the camera for only short periods it discharges gradually, and if you do not use the camera at all for about half a year it becomes completely discharged. In this case, be sure to charge this rechargeable button batte ry before using the camera. However, even if this rechargeable button battery is not charged, you can still use the camera as long as you do not record the date and time.

Charging method

Connect the camera to a wall outlet (mains) with the AC power adaptor/charger, or install a charged battery pack, and leave the camera for 24 hours or more with the POWER switch set to OFF.

On “Memory Sticks”

“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile IC recording medium with a data capacity that exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data among “Memory Stick” compatible products. Because it is removable, “Memory Stick” can also be used for external data storage.

There are two types of “Memory Sticks”: general “Memory Sticks” and “MagicGate Memory Sticks” that are equipped with the MagicGate* copyright protection technology. You can use both types of “Memory Stick” with your camera. However, because your camera does not support the MagicGate standards, data recorded with your c amera is not subject to MagicGate copyright protection.

MagicGate is copyright protection

∗

technology that uses encryption technology.

Notes

•

Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while reading or writing data.

•

Data may be damaged if: —you remove the “Memory Stick” or turn

off your camera while reading or writing data.

—you use the “Memory Stick” in a

location subject to the effects of static electricity or noise.

•

Do not attach any other mater i a l than the supplied label on th e labeling position .

•

Attach the label so that it does not stick out from the proper attachment location.

•

When you carry or store the “Memory Stick,” put it in its supplied case.

•

Do not touch the terminals of a “Memory Stick” with your hand or a metal object.

•

Do not strike, bend or drop the “Memory Stick.”

•

Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick.”

•

Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.

“Memory Stick”, , “MagicGate Memory Stick” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

“MagicGate” and are trademarks of Sony Corporation.

Using your camera abroad

Power sources

You can use your camera in any country or area with the supplied battery charger within 100 V to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Use the supplied AC power adaptor depending on the design o f the wall outlet (mains)

Watching the playback picture on TV

If you want to view the playback picture on a TV, you need a TV having a video input jack and a video connecting cable. The color system of the TV mus t be the same as that of your digital still camera. TV color systems differ from country to country. Check the following list:

NTSC system countries

Bahama Islands, Bolivia, Canada, Central America, Chile, Columbia, Ecuador, Jamaica, Japan, Korea, Mexico, Peru, Surinam, Taiwan, the Philippines, t he U.S.A., Venezuela, etc.

AC-VF10

[a]

, if necessary,

[b]

PAL system countries

Australia, Austria, Belgium, China, Denmark, Finland, Germany, Great Britain, Holland, Hong Kong, Italy, Kuwait, Malaysia, New Zealand, Norway, Portugal, Singapore, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Th ai la nd, etc.

PAL-M system country

Brazil

PAL-N system countries

Argentina, Paraguay, Uruguay

SECAM system countries

Bulgaria, Czech Republic, France, Guiana, Hungary, Iran, Iraq, Mon aco, Poland, Russia, Slovak Republic, Ukraine, etc.

Troubleshooting

If you experience trou ble with your camera, first ch eck the following items. Should your camera still n ot oper at e pr oper ly a fte r yo u ha v e ma de th ese ch eck s, co nsu lt yo ur Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility. If code displays (C:ss:ss) appear on the LCD screen, the self-diagnosis display function is working (page 63).

Symptom Cause and/or Solution

Your camera does not work.

Your camera cannot

Additional information

record images.

The picture is out of focus. •Your camera is not in macro recording mode when

The resizing functi on doe s not work.

You cannot display a print mark.

The picture is noisy.

•

You are not using an “InfoLITHIUM” batter y pack. t Use an “InfoLITHIUM” battery pack (page 9).

•

The battery level is low (the E indicator appears on the LCD screen). t Charge the battery pack (page 9).

•

The AC power adaptor is not connected securel y. t Connect it firmly to the battery terminal of your

camera and a wall ou tl et (mains) (page 12).

•

The built-in microcomputer is not working properly. t Disconnect and then reconnect all power

sources after one minute. Then turn the power on by sliding t h e POWER switch to the right and check that the camera w o rks properly .

•

The MODE selector is set to PLAY. t Set it to MOVIE or STILL (pages 16, 21).

•

No “Memory Stick” has been inserted into your camera. t Insert a “Memory Stick” (page 15).

•

The write-protect tab on the “Memory Sti ck ” is set to LOCK. t Set it to the recording position.

you shoot a subject that is abo ut 13/16 to 9 7/8 inches (2 to 25 cm) away from the lens.

t Set the macro recording mode (page 40). t Set the zoom lever to set to the W side.

•

You cannot resize moving images and text images.

•

You cannot display prin t ma rks on moving images and text images.

•

Your camera is placed near a TV or other equipment that uses stro ng m agnets. t Move your camera away from the TV, etc.

1-14

Page 21

Symptom Cause and/or Solution

The picture is too dark.•You are shooting a subject with a light source

The flash does not work. •The flash is set to .

The date and time are recorded incorrectly.

Vertical streaks appear when you are shooting a very bright subject.

The battery life is short.•You are recording/playing back images under

The battery remaining indicator is incorrect.

Sufficient battery remaining indicator is displayed but the power runs out soon.

The zoom does not work. •PROGRAM AE is set to the Panfocus mode.

behind the subject.

t Adjust the expo sure (page 43). t Adjust the brightn es s of the LCD screen (page

36).

t Set the flash to au to (no indicator), or

(page 19).

•

PROGRAM AE is set to the Twilight, Twilight plus, or Landscape mode. t Cancel the mode (page 41) or set the flash to

•

The MODE selector is set to MOVIE. t Set it to STILL.

•

The flash is not popped up. t Pop up the flash (page 19).

•

The date and time are not set correctly. t Set the correct date and time (page 13).

•

The smear phenomenon is happening. t This is not a malfunction.

extremely cold temperatures.

•

The battery pack is not charged enou gh. t Charge the battery pack fully.

•

The battery pack is dead. t Replace the battery pack with a new one (page

11).

•

You have used the camera for a long time in an extremely hot or an extremely cold location.

•

The battery pack is dead. t Replace the battery pack with a new one (page

11).

•

The battery pack is discharged.

t Install a charged batter y pack (pages 9, 11). t Fully charge the battery pack (page 9).

t Cancel the Panfocus mode (page 41).

Symptom Cause and/or Solution

Digital zoom does not function.

Your camera cannot pla y back images.

The image and sound are interfered by noise when you play back an image on a personal computer.

The image cannot be played back on a personal computer.

Y our camera cannot delete an image.

The power turns off suddenly.

The image does not

Additional information

appear on the TV screen.

A file error occurs when you play back a file.

The PROGRAM AE function does not work.

The LCD screen freezes momentarily.

•

You cannot use digital zoom to record moving pictures.

•

The MODE selector is set to STILL or MOVIE. t Set it to PLAY (pages 22, 23).

•

You are playing back th e file di rectly from the “Memory Stick.” t Copy the file to the hard disk o f t he personal

computer and then play ba ck the file from the hard disk (page 28).

t Consult the person al computer or software

manufacturer.

•

The image is protected. t Cancel the protection (page50).

•

With the MODE selector set to STILL or MOVIE, if you do not operate the camera for about three minutes while the power is o n, the camera turns off automatically to prevent wearing down the battery. t Turn on the camera.

•

The battery is discharged. t Replace it with a charged battery.

•

The video output signal se tti ng of your camera is incorrect. t Change the setting (page 36).

•

The image size is larger than 2240×1680. t Use an image size of 2240×1680 or smaller.

•

The camera is set to text mode. t Cancel text mode (p age 39).

•

This is a characteristic of th e s ystem and is not a malfunction.

Symptom Cause and/or Solution

Your personal computer does not recognize your camera.

•

The camera is turned off. t Turn on the camera.

•

The battery level is low. t Use the AC power adaptor/charger (page 12).

•

The USB cable is not connected firmly. t Disconnect the USB cable, and connect it again

firmly . Mak e sure that “PC MODE” is di splayed on the LCD screen (page 26 ).

•

The USB connectors on your personal computer are connected to other equipment besides the keyboard, the mouse, and your camera. t Disconnect the USB cables except for the ones

connected to the keyboard, the mouse, and your camera (page 25).

Warning and notice messages

Various messages appear on the LCD screen. Check the corresponding descriptions in the following list.

Message Meaning

NO MEMORY STICK No “Memory Stick” has been inserted. SYSTEM ERROR Turn the power off and on again. MEMORY STICK ERROR The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be

FORMAT ERROR Failed to format the “Memory Stick.” MEMORY STICK LOCKED The write-protect tab on the “Memory

NO MEMORY SPACE The capacity of the “Memory Stick” is

NO FILE No image has been recorded on the

FILE ERROR An error occurred while playing back the

FILE PROTECT The im age is protected against erasure.

Additional information

for “InfoLITHIUM” battery only The battery is not the “InfoLITHIUM”

NOT ENOUGH MEMORY The images you want to copy are too big

DIRECTORY ERROR A directory with the same name already

IMAGE SIZE OVER You are playing back an image of a size

INVALID OPERATION You are playing back a file that was

used with your camera, or is damaged.

Stick” is set to the LOCK position.

full, and you cannot record or copy images.

“Memory Stick.”

image.

type.

to copy with your camera.

exists.

that cannot be played back with your camera.

created on equipment other than your camera.

The battery level is low or zero. The image is protected.

1-15

Page 22

Self-diagnosis display

Your camera has a self-diagnosis display. This function displays the camera condition on the LCD screen with a comb i nation of a letter and four digits of numbers. If this occurs, check the following code chart. The code informs you of the camera’s curr ent condition. The last two digits (indicated by ss) will differ de pending on the state of the camera.

Self-diagnosis display

•

C:ss:

You can reverse the camera malfunction yourself.

•

E:ss:

Contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

First three digits Cause and/or Corrective Action

C:32:

C:13:

E:61:

E:91:

If you are unable to solve the problem even after trying the corrective actions a few times, contact your Sony dealer or local authorized Sony service facility.

•

There is trouble with you r camera’s hardware. t Turn the power off and on again.

•

An unformatted “Memory Stick” is inse rted. t Format the “Memory Stick” (page 33).

•

The inserted “Memory Stick” cannot be used with your camera, or is damaged. t Insert a new “Memory Stick” (page 15).

•

A camera malfunction that you cannot reverse has occurred. t Contact your Sony dealer or loc al authorized

Sony service facility and inform them of the 5digit service code. (example: E:61:10)

LCD screen indicators

The indicators during recording

1856

A Battery remaining indicator B PROGRAM AE/flash mode/

flash level indicator

C White balance/EV level/

sharpness indicator

D Picture effect indicator

Additional information

E Date/time indicator F Aperture/shutter speed

indicator

G AE lock/focus lock indicator H Recording mode indicator I Image size indicator

J Self-diagnosis function/

recording time indicator

K Number of recorded images L Remaining memory capacity

indicator

M Moving image/VOICE recording

time indicator

N Self-timer indicator O Spot light-metering indicator P Focus/macro mode indicator Q Menu bar and guide menu

They appear by pressing control button and disappear by pressing V of it.

on the

Additional information

When playing back still images

A Protect indicator B Print mark indicator C File name D Recording mode indicator E Image size indicator F Image num be r

When playing back moving images

45 6

min

VOL.

INDEX

SELECT OK

A VOL. (Volume) indicator B Playback/pause buttons

: during pause

: during playback

C Fast-forward/rewind buttons D Recording mode indicator E Image size indicator

G Number of stored images in

“Memory Stick”

H Remaining memory capacity

indicator

I Recording date of the playback

image/menu bar and guide menu

6/8

320

0:12

8 9 0

SETUPTOOLDELETE

FILE

MENU BAR OFF

F Image number/number of

stored images in “Memory Stick”

G Remaining memory capacity

indicator

H Counter I Playback image J Play bar K Menu bar an d guide menu

1-16 E

1-16

Page 23

• This set can be disassembled in the order shown below.

DSC-F505V

SECTION 2

DISASSEMBLY

DSC-F505V

2-5. LCD PANEL BLOCK

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK) (Page 2-4)

SERVICE POSITION-2

· LCD PANEL BLOCK

· CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK) (Page 2-4)

2-1. REAR CABINET BLOCK

(Page 2-2)

2-11. CRYSTAL INDICATION

MODULE (Page 2-8)

2-6. HI-73, DD-148 BOARDS,

BATTERY HOLDER BLOCK (Page 2-5)

2-7. UPPER CABINET BLOCK

FLASH UNIT (MC) (Page 2-5)

SERVICE POSITION-3

· HI-73 BOARD

· DD-148 BOARD (Page 2-6)

2-8. FRONT CABINET

ASSEMBLY (Page 2-6)

FP-37 FLEXIBLE BOARD (Refer to 2-9. and 2-10.) (Page 2-7)

2-2. ZOOM LENS BLOCK

(Page 2-2)

2-3. CABINET (LT) BLOCK

(Page 2-3)

2-4. LENS BLOCK

(Page 2-3)

SERVICE POSITION-1 (LENS, BLOCK AREA)

· CD-283 BOARD

· PS-434 BOARD

· SY-62 BOARD (Page 2-3)

2-12. FLASH UNIT (ST)

(Page 2-8)

• ATTACHMENT OF CPC-9 JIG

Control switch block (FK) (CN002)

Two claws

Note 1: Don't use the 12 pin flexible board of CPC-9 jig.

It causes damage to the unit.

Note 2: The old CPC-9 jig (Parts code: J-6082-393-B)

cannot be used, because it cannot operate the adjustment remote commander.

CPC cover

CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) (18p flexible board)

Slide the Release knob in the direction of arrow A. To open the Battery lid.

Release knob

2-1

Page 24

Note: Follow the disassembly procedure in the numerical order given.

2-1. REAR CABINET BLOCK

Front cabinet assembly

2 Two screws (M1.7)

4 FP-134 flexible board (CN901)

5 Flexible board (Control switch block (FK))

(CN705)

1 Two screws (M1.7)

3 Rear cabinet assembly

6 Harness (HB-50)

(CN706)

7 Harness (speaker) (CN252)

2-2. ZOOM LENS BLOCK

6 Zoom lens block

1 Screw (M1.7)

4 FP-37 flexible board

(CN802)

5 FP-37 flexible board (CN801)

3 Screw (M1.7)

2 Screw (M1.7)

7 MF ornament

2-2

Page 25

2-3. CABINET (LT) BLOCK 2-4. LENS BLOCK

Flash unit

(Note)

2 Screw (M1.7)

3 Cabinet (LT) block

7 Two screws

(M1.7)

5 Harness (MS-114) (Flash unit (ST), 2P) (Note)

8 Screw (M1.7)

2 Flexible board

(CN803)

1 Push the Release knob

4 FP-136 flexible board

(CN804)

Harness clamp

Cabinet (LT) block

(Bottom view)

Note: Clamp the cables after attaching the Harness

(MS-114). If clamped with the flash unit closed, the flash unit cannot be opened. Be sure to clamp the cable with the flash unit opened.

0 Lens block

6 Cabinet (MF)

assembly

3 Flexible board (CN001)

4 Control switch block (CF)

9 Cabinet (LB) assembly

5 Two screws (M1.7)

[SERVICE POSITION-1 (LENS BLOCK AREA: CD-283, PS-434, SY-62 BOARDS)]

Rear cabinet block

1 Screw (M1.7)

FP-37 flexible board (Not used)

Harness (MS-114) (to Cabinet (LT) block)

Cabinet (MF) assembly

Control switch block (CF)

PS-434 board

SY-62 board

2-3

Lens block

Extension cable (39, 39P 0.3 mm) Parts No. : 1-678-657-11 (HI-73 board: CN701, 702) (SY-62 board: CN801, 802)

Cabinet (LT) block (Flash unit (ST))

Harness (MS-114) (from Front cabinet block)

Extension cable (39P 0.3 mm) Parts No. : J-6082-448-A

CD-283 board

(PS-434 board: CN602) (CD-283 board: CN101)

Page 26

2-5. LCD PANEL BLOCK, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK)

8 Control switch block (FK)

Rear cabinet assembly

3 Two screws (1.7 × 4)

4 Two screws (1.7)

2 Zoom switch

(RV001)

1 Screw (1.7 × 4)

6 Screw (M1.7)

9 Button (LCD bright)

0 Knob (LCD back light)

7 Two screws (M1.7)

5 LCD panel block

(Refer to 2-11. Crystal indication module)

[SERVICE POSITION-2 (REAR CABINET AREA: LCD PANEL BLOCK, CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK))]

Cold cathode fluorescent tube (ND901) (with Inverter transformer unit)

Control switch block (FK)

FP-134 flexible board (CN901)

Crystal indication module (LCD901)

SP901

Flexible board (control switch block (FK)) (CN705)

(with FP-134 flexible board)

Harness (speaker) (CN252)

2-4

Page 27

2-6. HI-73, DD-148 BOARDS, BATTERY HOLDER BLOCK

1 FP-132 flexible board (HI-73 board: CN707) (DD-148 board: CN003)

5 Three screws (1.7 × 4)

qa Two screws (1.7 × 4)

8 Screw (M1.7)

0 Battery holder block

9 Screw

(M1.7)

qs DD-148 board

6 HI-73 board

2 FP-37 flexible board

(CN701, 702)

3 Harness (microphone) (CN251)

7 Harness (MD-97) (CN002)

4 Control switch block (PW) (CN704)

2-7. UPPER CABINET BLOCK, FLASH UNIT (MC)

Note: When the flash unit (MC) charging failed, Page: D, Address: 67, Data: 04 are written.

After repair, be sure to write Page: D, Address: C7, Data: 00.

3 Two claws

4 Upper cabinet block

Groove

2 Harness (GN-52)

6 Claw

5 Harness (MS-114)

Groove

1 Screw (M1.7)

7 Flash unit (MC) (Note)

Edge

Flash unit (MC)

Details diagram on removal and attachment of Control switch block (PW)

Upper cabinet block

Claw

Hole

Claw

Screw (1.7 × 4)

Control switch block (PW)

JK retainer assembly

Groove

Claw

Screw (1.7 × 4)

Note for installation of Flash unit (MC)

Should be fit to the Front cabinet groove.

2-5

Groove

Page 28

[SERVICE POSITION-3 (HI-73, DD-148 BOARDS)]

Control switch block (PW)

Front cabinet block

DD-148 board

FP-37 flexible board (Not used)

HI-73 board

Rear cabinet block

Harness (HB-50) (CN706)

Harness (speaker) (CN252)

Zoom lens block

2-8. FRONT CABINET ASSEMBLY

4 Front cabinet assembly

Battery holder block (to AC power adaptor)

Extension cable (39, 39P 0.3 mm) Parts No. : 1-678-657-11 (HI-73 board: CN701, 702) (SY-62 board: CN801, 802)

1 Lift up the Zoom lens block.

3 Screw (M2 × 4)

2 Screw (M2 × 4)

2-6

Page 29

2-9. REMOVAL AND ATTACHMENT OF FP-37 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Note: For folding new FP-37 flexible board, refer to “2-10. To fold the

new FP-37 flexible board” .

FP-37 flexible board

Harness (MS-114)

Harness (GN-52)

FP holder

FP-37 flexible board (CN801)

When attaching, coil in the direction of arrow A with two and a half revolutions. (FP-37 flexible board )

Hook cover

Harness (GN-52)

FP-37 flexible board (CN802)

Screw (M1.7)

Screw (M2 x 4)

Hook the claw of harness

Harness (MS-114)

Hinge cover

Harness (GN-52)

FP guard

2-10. TO FOLD THE NEW FP-37 FLEXIBLE BOARD

: Fold

Adhesive tape

: Fold

Adhesive tape

1-678-657-xx

FP-37

Adhesive tape

1-678-657-xx

FP-37

Adhesive tape

Note: For attaching new FP-37 flexible board, refer

to “2-9. Removal and attachment of FP-37 flexible board” .

2-7

Page 30

2-11. CRYSTAL INDICATION MODULE

Note for installation

Portion A and B

Portion C and D

8 Cold cathode fluorescent tube (ND901)

5 FP-134 flexible board

7 Screw (M1.7)

2 Crystal indication module (LCD901)

3 BL cushion

6 Flexible board

(Inverter transformer unit)

9 Inverter transformer unit

1 Flexible board

(FP-134 board)

4 Screw (M1.7)

2-12. FLASH UNIT (ST)

1 Screw (M1.7 × 4)

7 Flash unit (ST)

5 Three claws

6 Cabinet (ST)

2 FP-136 flexible board

(Flash unit ST)

4 Claw

2-8

3 Push the Release knob

Page 31

2-13. CIRCUIT BOARDS LOCATION

FLASH UNIT (MC)

FLASH UNIT (ST)

DD-148 (DC/DC CONVERTER)

INVER TER TRANSFORMER UNIT

PS-434 (CAMERA DISPLAY, MEMORY, AUDIO AD/DA CONVERTER, LENS DRIVE)

CN-121 (CONNECTION)

HI-73 (LCD DRIVE, TIMING GENERATOR, VIDEO, USB I/F, AUDIO, HI CONTROL)

CD-283 (CCD IMAGER, CAMERA)

SY-62 (SH DSP, MEMORY)

2-14. FLEXIBLE BOARDS LOCATION

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK)

FP-136

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PW)

FP-132

FP-36

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF)

MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK

2-9

FP-134

FP-37

LENS BLOCK

Page 32

3-1. OVERALL BLOCK DIAGRAM

DSC-F505V

SECTION 3

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

LENS

M902

FOCUS

MOTOR

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

FOCUS

MOTOR

DRIVE

MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

BRIGHT

LEVEL

SENSOR

FLASH UNIT (ST)

FLASH

CONTROL

DC 300V

M901

ZOOM

MOTOR

FOCUS

SENSOR

IC402

ZOOM

MOTOR

DRIVE

PE EN0, PE DIR0A, PE DIR0B

MANUAL FOCUS

SWITCH

PHOTOTR OUT

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

STRB ON

FLASH UNIT (MC)

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

BT901

BATTERY

TERMINAL

ND FILTER

MOTOR

ZOOM

SENSOR

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF)

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

FOCUS A, B KEY AD4

FLASH

CHARGE

–

FILTER

M M

HALL

HALL (+) HALL AD

PE EN1, PE DIR1A, PE DIR1B

ST UNREG

STB CHARGE XSTB FULL

BATT UNREG

BATT SIG

BATT GND

IRIS

METER

DRIVE (–)

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

IRIS DRIVE

HALL AMP

FUNCTION

SWITCH

OPEN (FLASH)

SWITCH

DD-148 BOARD

CD-283 BOARD PS-434 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

IC404 IC405

IC101

CCD

IMAGER

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

V1A, V1B, V2, V3A, V3B, V4, VSHT

IC403

IRIS

DRIVE

IRIS CONT 1, 2

XSTB OPEN

V OUT

H1, H2

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-20)

STRB ON

IC001

DC/DC

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-45)

SH, AGC, A/D

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

GENERATOR

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

ND FILTER

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

MSHUT ONDRIVE (+)

IC406

EVR D/A

Z SENS RST

F SENS RST

IC103

IC102

TIMING

IC401

DRIVE

CAM SO, XCAM SCK

PE DAC LEVEL 1, 2

CNT Y, CNT C

SP VOL

DATA BUS 12

ND ONND DRIVE (–)

EVER 3.5V PANEL +13.5V PANEL +4.9V PANEL +6.5V A +4.9V M +5V PANEL –15V CAM –7.5V D 3.2V CAM +15V D 1.8V A 3.2V

SYS DD ON LCD DD ON CAM DD ON

HI UNREG BL UNREG

IC301

CAMERA DSP,

MEMORY CONTROL,

VIDEO DECODER,

CAM SO, XCAM SCK

OPD, OSD,

HOST IF,

RES CONTROL,

SG, JPEG,

L-MODE

(SEE PAGE 4-16)

EVER 3.5V

12 20

Y OUT

C OUT

AU SDTI AU SDTO

PANEL Y

PANEL R-Y PANEL B-Y EXT STRB ON PHOTOTR OUT STRB ON

HI UNREG

IC407

3.1V

REGULATOR

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

ADDRESS BUS 1414

DATA BUS 1616

CN-121 BOARD

(SEE PAGE 4-17)

IC252

AUDIO AD/DA

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-17)

IC408

RESET

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

IC402

RESET

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

IC405

TIMER CLOCK

(SEE PAGE 4-42)

+ –

IC504

16M FLASH ROM (SEE PAGE 4-25)

16 16 14

DATA BUS

ADDRESS BUS

(SEE PAGE 4-24)

IC303 IC304

64M

SDRAM

A OUT L REC OUT

BACK UP VCC XPWER SW

SYS DD ON LCD DD ON

CAM DD ON

BATT SIG

STB CHARGE

XSTB FULL

RTS SIO, RTS SCK

BT001

LITHIUM

BATTERY

CAM SI, CAM SO, XCAM SCK

IC404

HI CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 4-42)

IC506

64M SDRAM

(SEE PAGE 4-25)

IC507

EEPROM

HALL AD

FOCUS A FOCUS B KEY AD4 XSTB OPEN

HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK

XSHTR LOCK SW XSHTR SW

MOVIE/XSTILL SW XCAM/PB SW BL ON KEY AD1 KEY AD2 ZOOM SW AD

(SEE PAGE 4-23)

HI SO, XHI SCK

LANC OUT

LANC IN

SY-62 BOARD

IC501

MC CAM,

SH DSP

MS DIO, MS BS, MS SCLK

USB DATA

HI SO, HI SI, XHI SCK

IC801

I/O EXP

(EVR)

(SEE PAGE 4-31)

IC406

EEPROM

(SEE PAGE 4-42)

IC401 LANC

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

HI-73 BOARD

IC601

USB I/F

(SEE PAGE 4-40)

V OUT ON

Y OUT

C OUT

CNT Y, CNT C

SP VOL

A OUT L

REC OUT

PANEL Y PANEL R-Y PANEL B-Y

LANC SIG

LANC DC

D+

D–

IC651

VIDEO

AMP

(SEE PAGE 4-36)

IC253

AUDIO

AMP

(SEE PAGE 4-37)

IC803

LCD

DRIVE

(SEE PAGE 4-32)

BL ON

EXT STRB ON

VR VG VB

BL UNREG

KEY AD1

KEY AD2

ZOOM SW AD

CN703

MEMORY

STICK

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PW)

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

XPWER SW

XSHTR LOCK SW

XSHTR SW

MOVIE/XSTILL SW

XCAM/PB SW

SP OUT+, SP OUT–

MIC SIG

IC901

LCD

TIMING

GENERATOR

(SEE PAGE 4-33)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK)

(SEE PAGE 4-49, 50)

D+ D–

V OUT

AU OUT

POWER

SWITCH

SHUTTER

SWITCH

MOVIE/STILL

/PLAY

SWITCH

INVERTER

TRANSFORMER

UNIT

FUNCTION

KEY

ZOOM

SWITCH

CN002

DIGITAL

I/O

J001

A/V OUT (MONO)

SP901

SPEAKER

MICROPHONE

LCD901

COLOR

LCD

UNIT

ND901

BACK LIGHT

J9001

(EXT FLASH)

MIC901

3-1 3-2

Page 33

DSC-F505V

3-8. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 1

BT901

BATTERY

TERMINAL

–

DD-148 BOARD FLASH UNIT (MC)

CN002 CN001

CN001

BATT UNREG

BATT SIG

BATT GND

F001

F002

F003

F004

Q011

SWITCHING

495 kHz

IC001 1

ST UNREG ST UNREG

STRB CHARGE

XSTRB FULL

T003

8 54

2 51

1.2 Vp-p

D006 RECT

D001 RECT

SYS DD ON

CAM DD ON

LCD DD ON

2 2

3 4

V+

V-

VCC = UN+1.6V VG = 6V

STRB CHARGE

XSTRB FULL

DC/DC CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

VCC (0) 1 – 2

VCC (0) 3, 4

VCC (0) 5, 6, 7

VSS (0) 1– 2 VSS (0) 4, 5, 6

VCC

VG (0) 1

+IN (E) 7

-IN (E) 7 – 2

OUT7

CTL1 – 4 7

CTL5

CTL6

IC001

L001

-IN (C) 6 OUT6

-IN (A) 6

-IN (E) 6

OUT5

-IN (C) 5

-IN (E) 5

-IN (C) 8

OUT4

-IN (E) 4

OUT3

-IN (E) 3

OUT2 – 1

OUT2 – 2

-IN (E) 2

OUT1 – 1

OUT1 – 3

OUT1 – 4

-IN (E) 1

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

Q001, 002

14 63 10

62 17

57 39

48 44

Q014

Q003

TRANS DRIVE

Q009

SWITCHING

Q010

SWITCHING

L004

Q003, 005, 006

DRIVE

L005

Q004, 007, 008

DRIVE

Q012

SWITCHING

F 3 2

P 1

3 2

EMERGENCY

Q013

SWITCHING

T001

T002

Q025

DETECT

SWITCHING

L002

Q022

Q019

SWITCHING

D002

D005 RECT

2 3

6 7

Q021

SWITCHING

L003

Q020

D003

D007

RECT

SWITCHING

Q006

Q015

DC 300V

CN002

C009

Q023 (1/2) Q024 (1/2)

D004 RECT

1 2

CN003

DC 300V

FLASH UNIT (ST)

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

L016

L013

L012

L009

Q023 (2/2) Q024 (2/2)

Q016, Q017

L001

L014

Q030, Q31

CN004

A 4.9V

Q032, 033

L010

L015

L011

L006

L007

L008

IC002 DC/DC

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-46)

D002

V OUT

XSTRB FULL

STRB CHARGE

BL UNREG

HI UNREG

PANEL +13.5V

PANEL +6.5V

PANEL -15V

PANEL +4.9V

CAM +15V

CAM -7.5V

A +4.9V

2 3

EVER 3.5V

TO SY-62

BOARD

(CN804)

(SEE PAGE 3-18)

CN003

7 9

M +5V

D 1.8V

A 3.2V

31 32

D 3.2V

24 26

HI-73

BOARD

(CN 707)

(SEE PAGE 3-17)

BATT SIG

BAT SIG

SYS DO ON

CAM DD ON

LCD DD ON

SYS DD ON LCD DD ON

CAM DD ON

5 11 13 19

3-15 3-16

Page 34

3-9. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 2

HI-73 BOARD SY-62 BOARD CN-121 BOARD

CN707 CN702

CAM -7.5V

CAM +15V

D 1.8V

M +5V

20 22

A +4.9V

15 16

A 3.2V

31 32

D 3.2V

24 26

TO DD-148

BOARD

(CN003)

(SEE PAGE 3-16)

PANEL +6.5V

PANEL +4.9V

PANEL +13.5V

PANEL -15V

FB601

L802

L903

L901

L902

L255 L252

Q253

L254

L801

IC601

UBS I/F

SEE PAGE

4-40

L651 L652

IC253

AUDIO

(EVR)

SEE PAGE

4-37

IC801

I/O EXP

(EVR)

SEE PAGE

4-31

IC803

LCD

DRIVE

SEE PAGE

4-32

Q651, 652

TIMING

GENERATOR

SEE PAGE

D701

(ACCESS)

IC901

LCD

4-33

IC651

VIDEO

AMP

SEE PAGE

4-36

Q702, 703

IC902

VCO,

COM AMP

SEE PAGE

4-33

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

MS POWER ON MS POWER ON

38 37

D 1.8V

M 5V

35 36

A 4.9V

33 34

A 3.2V

31 32

D 3.2V

26 27

CN701

33 7

CN703

VCC

3 9

CN901

VSH

16 25

VGH

VSS

LCD901

COLOR

MEMORY

STICK

LCD

UNIT

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

D 1.8V

M 5V

4 5

A 4.9V

6 7

A 3.2V

8 9

D 3.2V

13 14

L501 L502

CN801

L506

LED901

ND901 BACK LIGHT

IC501

MC CAM SH DSP

SEE PAGE

4-23

D29/PTB5

D21/PTA5

DSC-F505V

CN805 CN002 CN001CN802

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

IC503

INVERTER SEE PAGE

4-24

IC507

EEPROM

SEE PAGE

4-24

L505

L504

D 3.2V

Q801, 802

FB503

FB501

IC504

16M FLASH

ROM

SEE PAGE

4-25

IC506

64M SDRAM

SEE PAGE

4-25

CN803

DAC ENB

STRB PHOTO ON

4 3

D 1.8V

M 5V

5 6

A 4.9V

7 8

A 3.2V

D 3.2V

11 12

CN002

D 3.2V

PHOTOTR 5V

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF)

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

FUNCTION

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

5 6 7 8

11 12

D 1.8V

M 5V

A 4.9V

A 3.2V

D 3.2V

DAC ENB

STRB PHOTO ON

CN001 CN004

4 3

5 6 7 8

11 12

(MANUAL FOCUS)

MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

PS-434

BOARD

(CN601)

(SEE PAGE 3-19)

RV1, RV2

BRIGHT

LEVEL

SENSOR

Q004

3 4

7 9

5 11 13 19

BL UNREG

EVER 3.5V

HI UNREG

L703 L704

SWITCHING

XSTRB FULL

STRB CHARGE

BATT SIG SYS DD ON LCD DD ON CAM DD ON

Q706

2 3

3.1V REGULATOR (SEE PAGE 4-41)

5 EXT

D705

VIN V OUT

IC407

(SEE PAGE 4-40)

DC/DC

CONVERTER

(5.5V REG)

IC701

L401

ON/OFF

V OUT

BATT SIG

CN706

Q704 (1/2) Q705 (1/2)

BACK UP VCC

1 38

XRESET

IC402

RESET

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

XRESET

IC408

RESET

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

1 2

Q409

BATTERY

CHARGE

DETECTOR

SYS DD ON

CAM DD ON

LCD DD ON

XSTRB FULL

STRB CHG

DD CON SENS

XBL LED ON

XRESET

IC404

HI CONTROL

(SEE PAGE 4-42)

SYS DD ON

CAM DD ON

LCD DD ON

BATT SI

BATT SO

XLANC ON

XSTB FULL

STRB CHG

BL ON

D410

Q413

L701

Q704 (2/2) Q705 (2/2)

IC406

EEPROM

SEE PAGE

4-42

BT001 LITHIUM BATTERY

–

11 43

BL UNREG

BL ON

BL LED ON

CN704 CN001

D 3.2V

CN705

D 3.2V

HI UNREG

VDD

IC405

TIMER CLOCK

SEE PAGE

4-42

IC401 LANC

SEE PAGE

4-41

CN1 CN2

BL ON

INVERTER TRNSFORMER UNIT

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PW)

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

D 3.2V

CN001 CN002

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK)

(SEE PAGE 4-49, 50)

HI UNREG

VDD

D006

(FLASH LAMP)

RV001

T W

(ZOOM)

19 20

3 4

D004

(REC LED)

(RED)

D007

(POWER LED)

(GREEN)

MOVIE STILL PLAY

CPC

(FOR CHECK)

S001

MODE

SWITCH

CN804

A 4.9V

TO FLASH 5 6

UNIT (ST)

(CN004)

(SEE PAGE 3-16)

3-17 3-18

Page 35

DSC-F505V

3-10. POWER BLOCK DIAGRAM 3

TO CN-121 BOARD

(CN001)

(SEE PAGE 3-18)

PS-434 BOARD

CN601

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

A 4.9V

7 8

A 3.2V

M 5V

5 6

L401

L403

IC402

FOCUS/ZOOM

MOTOR

DRIVE

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

IC403

IRIS

DRIVE

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

IC405

HALL AMP

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

Q403, 404

IC404

IRIS

DRIVE

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

IC401

ND FILTER

DRIVE

(SEE PAGE 4-19)

CN602

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

A 4.9V

CH 3.2V

CN401

ND DRIVE (+)

F SENS VCC

6 7

4 5

LENS BLOCK

ND FILTER

MOTOR

FOCUS

SENSOR

CD-283 BOARD

CN101

CAM -7.5V

CAM 15V

A 4.9V

33 34

CH 3.2V

35 36

FB109

FB108

L104

L102

FB101

L101

FB103

FB105

FB107

L103

IC101

CCD

IMAGER

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

IC102

TIMING

GENERATOR

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

IC103

SH, AGC, A/D

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-9)

D 3.2V

11 12

D 1.8V

13 14

STRB PHOTO ON

DAC ENB

L402

L302

L253

L404

FB304

FB302

FB301

IC303

64M

SDRAM

(SEE PAGE 4-17)

IC304

64M

SDRAM

(SEE PAGE 4-17)

IC252

AUDIO AD/DA

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-17)

Q406

L303

L304

L301

Q408, 409

155

XLENS RST LED

IC301

CAMERA DSP,

MEMORY CONTROL,

VIDEO DECODER,

OPD, OSC, HOST, IF,

RES CONTROL,

SG, JPEG, L-MODE

(SEE PAGE 4-16)

158

STRB PHOTO ON

IC406

EVP D/A

CONVERTER

(SEE PAGE 4-20)

Z SENS VCC

ZOOM

SENSOR

3-20 E3-19

Page 36

DSC-F505V

HI-73 (VIDEO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveforms.

2 106

49735

HI-73 BOARD (3/6)

VIDEO (VI BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

A_4.9V

A_3.2V

VOUT_ON

CNT_C

CNT_Y

C_OUT

L651

47uH

Q651

2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO

B+ SWITCH

3.8

R657

22k

C653

0.1u

L652

10uH

3.14.8

Q652

2SA1586YG-TE85L

SWITCHING

3.2

R658

47k

C664

10u

6.3V

R652

10k

C658

0.1u

1.3

1.8

C-IN

NJM2568V(TE2)

C663 100u

4.8

3.1

V+1

V+2

GCTL/PSAVE

1.8

1.7

V+1

VOUT

VSAG

C662

22u

6.3V

IC651

VIDEO AMP

R656

V_OUT

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

VIDEO

HI-73 (3/6)

CLAMPREF2YIN3GCTL/MUTE4CLAMP5D-CHGCONT6GND7GND

IC651

C657

0.1u

1.5

1.3

02.1

1.4

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

R653

R655

10k

R654

10k

REC

CHROMA

Y/CHROMA

C659

0.1u

C660

10u 10V

C661

10u

6.3V

Y_OUT

C651 100u

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

REG_GND

10V

C652

0.1u

C654

C655

47u

6.3V

C656

0.1u

R651

10k

4-35 4-36

Page 37

HI-73 (AUDIO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board.

DSC-F505V

381310 14

1211

HI-73 BOARD (4/6)

AUDIO (AU BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE

HI-73 BOARD (6/6)

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

MIC901

MIC

BEEP_ON

XAU_LINE_MUTE

XAU_SP_MUTE

AU_HGL_SEL

SP_VOL

REC_OUT

AOUT_L

CN251

SIGNAL PATH

BEEP

AUDIO

SIGNAL

REC

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

R291

R292

A_4.9V

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

SP901

SPEAKER

A_3.2V

M_5V

CN252

1 SP_OUT-

2 SP_OUT+

REG_GND

AU_GND

AU_OUT

C274

0.47u

C282

C269

6.3V 10u

1.5

3.1

C264

0.47u

C259

0.022u

R259

2200

R260 1500

C261

2200p

C262

4.7u

6.3V C263

16V

R263

27k

R262 2200

C266

0.015u

R266

R256

C260

0.01u

R255

2700

C258

0.022u

R254

C251

1MIC SIG

2MIC GND

R289

R290

C265

0.015u

C267

0.01u

R265

1.6

1.5

47k

56k

1.5

VREF

STBY

REC_OUT

BIAS

LPF_OUT

LPF_IN2

LPF_IN1

AGC_OUT

GND

AGC_DET

WHPF_OUT

WHPF_BIAS

WHPF_IN

LING_IN

MIC_OFF

GAIN_SET38MIC_OUT39WIND_ON40MIC_IN412VOUT42VREG_C43VREF_H44VCCH45GND46LINE_OUT47SP_SAVE48SP_VCC

1.5

R270

15k

C278

47u

R251

1200

C252

C255

10u

L252

10V

47uH

R281

3.1

VCC

IC253

AN2905FHQ-EB

3.1

1.521.2

0.1u

C271

R272

1.5

PB_IN

HPF_SEL

AUDIO AMP

IC253

100

R271

C281

10u 10V

R286

SPAGC_ON/OFF

C279

R273 2200

2.4

6.3V

10u

C280

AGND

1.5

VOL_CTL

4.9

R282

33k

100

R288

0.4

2.4

VOL_OUT

SPAGC_DET

XAUDIO_MUTE

XBEEP_MUTE

BEEP_OUT

BEEP_MIX_IN

2.4

R280

R284 2200

UN9216J-(K8).SO

C298

0.47u

C253

0.1u

C283

0.47u

2.1

MIX_IN

BEEP_IN

MIX_OUT

SPA_IN

VREF_SP

SP_OUT-

SP_GND

SP_OUT+

4.3

Q254

AGND

C297

10u

6.3V

L254 47uH

C293

L255 10uH

Q253 FMMT617TA B+ SWITCH

4.9

4.3

C295

0.01u

R279

C254

22u

R277

47k

R287

43k

3.2

UN9113J-(K8).SO

AUDIO MUTEAUDIO MUTE

6.3V

C288

C289

16V

C290

4.7u

6.3V

R283 100k

R293

C291

0.01u

C292

0.01u

Q255

C294

0.47u

2.4

0.4

2.4

C285

0.47u

C299

0.047u

2.1

C287

10u

10V

2.1

C286

10V

10u

R285 100k

3.2

4-37 4-38

AUDIO

HI-73 (4/6)

Page 38

DSC-F505V

HI-73 (USB I/F) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board.

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

USB I/F (USB BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE

SY-62 BOARD (2/2)

CN801

(THROUGH THE

FP-37 FLEXIBLE) (SEE PAGE 4-25)

HI-73 BOARD

(1/6,2/6,3/6,4/6,6/6)

CN703

MEMORY STICK

MEMORY

STICK

SY-62 BOARD (2/2)

CN802

(THROUGH THE

FP-37 FLEXIBLE)

(SEE PAGE 4-25)

CN701

REG_GND

CN703

110

CN702

39P

REG_GND

MS_POWER_ON

VOUT_ON

EXT_STRB_ON

XSTB_OPEN

MC_HELP

ACCESS_LED

MC_XFLRST

XRST_SYS

REG_GND

MS_DIO

MS_SCLK

PANEL_V

XMC_CS

XHI_SCK

REG_GND

USB_D+PULLUP

USB_VBUS

USB_SUSPND

REG_GND

USB_D-IN

USB_D+IN

REG_GND

USB_XVDATA

USB_TXENL

REG_GND

USB_D+OUT

USB_D-OUT

REG_GND

10P

39P

REG_GND

CAM_-7.5V

CAM_15V

KEY_AD4

PAL/XNTSC

AU_HGL_SEL

XAU_SP_MUTE

XAU_LINE_MUTE

FOCUS_A

FOCUS_B

REG_GND

SP_VOL

REG_GND

AOUT_L

REG_GND

REC_OUT

REG_GND

PANEL_Y

PANEL_R-Y

PANEL_B-Y

REG_GND

MS_BS

SYS_V

HI_SO

A_4.9V

A_3.2V

D_1.8V

D_3.2V

CNT_C

CNT_Y

C_OUT

Y_OUT

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y Y/CHROMACHROMA

AUDIO

SIGNAL

REC

KEY_AD0

SYS_V

XMC_CS

XHI_SCK

HI_SO

R701

680

HI-73 BOARD (3/6)

VOUT_ON

PANEL_V

HDO

HI_SI

C702

0.1u

AU_HGL_SEL

XAU_SP_MUTE

XAU_LINE_MUTE

SP_VOL

CNT_C

CNT_Y

AOUT_L

REC_OUT

PANEL_Y

PANEL_R-Y

PANEL_B-Y

C_OUT

Y_OUT

C703

4.7u

6.3V

HI-73 BOARD (3/6)

D703

MA111-(K8).S0

HI-73 BOARD (4/6)

HI-73 BOARD (1/6)

HI-73 BOARD (2/6)

R708

47k

HDO

HI_SI

10Vss

9Vcc

8SCLK

7NC

6INT

5NC

4DIO

3Vcc

2BS

1Vss

M_5V

MS_BS

MS_DIO

MS_SCLK

XMS_IN

MS_DIO

MS_BS

LND701

MECA_GND

PAL/XNTSC

KEY_AD4

FOCUS_A

FOCUS_B

XMC_HELP

MC_XFLRST

XRST_SYS

XMS_IN

D701

CL-220UR-C-TS

(ACCESS)

5.2

Q701

UN9213J-(K8).SO

LED DRIVE

Q702 2SJ381-TD B+ SWITCH

3.2 3.2

C704

0.022u

R702 100k

UN9213J-(K8).SO

R705

3300

2.9

Q703

SWITCHING

R704

8 17

Q601

UN9113J-(K8).SO

VPO

USB_D+

USB_D-

SPEED

(NC)

5.5

3.1

S-8328H55MC-FZJ-TZ

RB461F-T106

3.2

8 9 10 11 12 13 14

VOUT ON/OFF

123

IC701

D705

XP4213-TXE SWITCHING

SWITCH

3.2

1.5

R603

1500

3.2

1.5

3.2

VSS

EXT

Q705

4.9

FB601

R604

R605

C601

0.1u

R707

Q706

C707

NDS355AN

SWITCHING

L704 33uH

3.1

0.3

5 4.9

R706

120

10u 10V

4.8

XP4113-TXE B+ SWITCH

Q704

3.8

<BL ON>

IC601

USB I/F

R602

R601

3.2

0R606

R607

3.2

0R608

3.2

D704

IC601

PDIUSBP11APW,118

1234567

MODE VCC

OE#

RCV

SUSPND

GND

C705

C706

4.7u

L701 10uH

IC701

5.5V SWITCHING REGULATOR

BL_ON

XBL_LED_ON

XBL_PWM

VMO/FSEO

1310 14

C708

4.7u

L703 10uH

XCAM/PB_SW

MOVIE/XSTILL_SW

XSHTR_SW

XSHTR_LOCK_SW

XPWER_SW

SELF_LED

POWER_LED

AV_JACK_IN

USB_DET

16151211

V_OUT

AU_OUT

AU_GND

21PCN704

XCAM/PB_SW

MOVIE/XSTILL_SW

XSHTR_SW

XSHTR_LOCK_SW

REG_GND

XPWER_SW

D_3.2V

SELF_LED

POWER_LED

REG_GND

FB705

FB704

FB703

CAM_DD_ON

LCD_DD_ON

SYS_DD_ON

STRB_CHG

XSTRB_FULL

BATT_SIG

R712

R703

AV_JACK_IN

AU_OUT

REG_GND

V_OUT

REG_GND

USB_DET

REG_GND

D-

D+

REG_GND

CN707

GND

A_3.2V

D_1.8V

D_3.2V

CAM+15V

D_3.2V

CAM-7.5V

M+5V

PANEL_-15V

M+5V

CAM_DD_ON

GND

A+4.9V

PANEL+6.5V

LCD_DD_ON

PANEL+4.9V

SYS_DD_ON

PANEL+13.5V

STRB_CHARGE

EVER_3.5V

XSTRB_FULL

HI_UNREG

BATT_SIG

BL_UNREG

GND

CN706

5 BL LED ON

4 BL PWM

3 BL ON

2 BL GND

1 BL UNREG

EXT_STRB_ON

A_3.2V

D_3.2V

40P

HI_UNREG

LANC_5.5V

PANEL_6.5V

PANEL_4.9V

EVER_3.5V

A_4.9V

PANEL_13.2V

PANEL_-15.3V

M_5V

XMS_IN

HI-73 BOARD (3/6)

HI-73 BOARD (4/6)

CONTROL SWITCH

BLOCK (PW)

CN001

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

HI-73 BOARD (1/6,3/6,4/6)

HI-73 BOARD (1/6,6/6)

DD-148 BOARD

CN003

(THROUGH THE

FP-132 FLEXIBLE)

(SEE PAGE 4-46)

HI-73 BOARD (6/6)

(THROUGH THE HB-50 HARNESS)

HI-73 BOARD (6/6)

HI-73 BOARD (1/6)

HI-73 BOARD (2/6)

HI-73 BOARD (6/6)

HI-73 BOARD (3/6,4/6)

HI-73 BOARD (4/6)

HI-73 BOARD (6/6)

HI-73 BOARD (2/6)

INVERTER

TRANSFORMER

UNIT

(FOR LCD)

ND901

(BACK LIGHT)

LED901

USB I/F

HI-73 (5/6)

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

4-39 4-40

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié.

Page 39

HI-73 (HI CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See pag e 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveforms.

DSC-F505V

HI-73 BOARD (6/6)

HI CONTROL (HI BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE S:STILL MODE P:PB MODE

CONTROL SWITCH

BLOCK (FK)

(SEE PAGE 4-49)

HI-73 BOARD (1/6)

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

HI-73 BOARD (2/6)

CN001

HI-73 BOARD (4/6)

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

HI-73 BOARD (1/6)

HI-73 BOARD (2/6)

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

EXT_STRB_ON

CN705

XCS_PANEL_D/A

D_3.2V

HI_UNREG

EVER_3.5V

REG_GND

LANC_5.5V

PANEL_COM

HSY

30P

REG_GND

ZOOM_SW_AD

REG_GND

XSTRB_LED

PANEL_COM

REG_GND

KEY_AD3

REG_GND

HI_UNREG

REG_GND

LANC_IN

LANC_DC

LANC_OUT

LANC_SIG

XLANC_JACK_IN

REG_GND

KEY_AD1

KEY_AD2

EXT_STRB_ON

XMS_IN

BEEP_ON

BEEP

D_3.2V

RESET

38 17

1310 14

16151211

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMA

REC

R489

IC408

3.8

IC407

+3.1V REG

IC407

RN5RZ31BA-TL

C401

10u 10V

Q707

UN9113J-(K8).SO

3.2

STROBE SWITCH

C709

HSY

PF7

TXD

RXD

VDD

R709

UN9213J-(K8).SO

3.2 0

Q708

SWITCH

R402

100k

R401 1M

GND

123

5NC6

GND

DATA

VCC

WAKE

XXR403

R404 100k

0.6

2SD2216J-R(TX).SO

R405 2700

VIN

C442

POWER

LANC_SIG

VOUT

L401

10uH

3.8

3.1

C443 10u 10V

DATA

LANC_OUT

LANC_IN

LANC_JACK_IN

Q401

BUFFER

ZOOM_SW_AD

XSTRB_LED

KEY_AD3

LANC_IN

LANC_OUT

KEY_AD1

KEY_AD2

22u

6.3V

C402

0.1u

2NC3C4

13NC14

C444

5.500.2

UNREG

LANC_DC

00.22.51.90.2

RESET

IC408

S-80820ANNP-EDH-T2

N.C.

Vss

IC402

S-80827HNNP-A9A-T2

N.C.

Vss

IC402

RESET

IC401

LANC

IC401

TL1596CPWR

D401

MA111-(K8).S0

R497

R496

SE401

(BALANCE SENSOR)

XRESET

3.9

Vdd

3.1

Vdd

3.1

Q413

UN9111J-(K8).SO

B+ SWITCH

0.2 3.1

3.1

470k

4700

470kR423

R422

3.1

100k

UN9213J-(K8).SO

MODULATOR

C409

470kR426

Q406

R427

R425

10k

4700

470k

R420

R490

PAL/XNTSC

RTS_SCK

RTS_SIO XRST_SYS

XBL_LED_ON

XEEPROM_WE

XPWR_SW

XCAM/PB_SW

BEEP_ON

BEEP

XSHTR_SW

XSHTR_LOCK_SW

MOVIE/XSTILL_SW

RTS_CS

CAM_DD_ON

UN9113J-(K8).SO

BEEP

Q405

INVERTER

R469

0.001u

C411

0.1u

C446

0.01u

R438

100k

R432 0

C412

C440

0.1u

C441

0.1u

R431

D406

1SS388(TPL3)

BATT/XEXT

R437

47k

R439

1.9

12345678910111213141516171819202122232425

LANC_IN

0.2

LANC_OUT

0(NTSC)/3(PAL)

PAL

(SIRCS_IN)

2.9

1kR433

1kR434

1kR435

1kR436

R440

XRIGHT_DOWN

2.9

XLEFT_DOWN

RTS_SCK

RTS_SIO

3.2

XRST_SYS

3.1

XLANC_ON

BL_LED_ON

3.1

XEEPROM_WE

GND

2.8

XPWR_SW

2.9

XCAM/PB_SW

2.9

XSHTR_SW

2.9

XSHTR_LOCK_SW

3.2

MS/DISK_IN

XLANC_PWR_ON

2.5

BATT/XEXT

XSTILL/MOVIE_SW

TXD

TRD

0.1

CS_RTS

S3.2/P0

CAM_DD_ON

R444

470k

R445 470k

R446 100k R447 100k R448 100k

R454

R455

100kR430

100k

R428

R429 2700

C410

3.3u

6.3V

BEEP_ON

XCS_EEPROM

3.1

BEEP_ON

XRST_FLASH

(EVF_LED_ON)AELOCK_LED

STRB_CHG

CHARGE_LED

XCS_EEPROM

3.2

STB_CHG

R406

R450

0.9

EVF_SENS

DD_CON_SENS

S579630PZ-TEB

ZOOM_SW_AD

1.7

ZOOM_SW

232C_SENS

IC404

HI CONTROL

IC404

R452

470k

R453 470k

3.1

GND

3.1

BACK_UP_Vcc

R494

R493

DIAL_B

3.2

DIAL_A

KEY_AD5

C416

100

EVF_DD_ON

FAST_CHARGE

MC_XFLRST

3.1

XCS_LCD_D/A

INIT_CHARGE

XCS_EVF_D/A

SYS_DD_ON

AV_JACK_IN

LANC_JACK_IN

XSTB_FULL

N.C

LCD_COM_XDATA

XCS_LCD_DRV

MELODY

PF7

XRESET

GND

20MHz_OUT

20MHz_IN

BACKUP_VCC

26272829303132333435363738394041424344454647484950

3.1 3.1

XCS_LCD_D/A

3.1033.1

SYS_DD_ON

AV_JACK_IN

LANC_JACK_IN

R449

R495

22k

XSTRB_FULL

R451

47k

3.1

0.022u

C417

BL_ON

1.6

1.4

3.1

C418

0.1u

BL_ON

KEY_AD4

3.2

KEY_AD4

HI_SI

2.5

HI_SI

KEY_AD3

10k

R492

R491

3.2

2.2

HI_SO

KEY_AD2

10k

R462

R463

3.2

KEY_AD3

HI_SO

2.5

R464

XHI_SCK

KEY_AD1

R465

R466

3.2

KEY_AD2

XHI_SCK

3.1

LCD_DD_ON

KEY_AD0

10k

3.2

KEY_AD1

LCD_DD_ON

0.9

R467

10k

R468

3.1

KEY_AD0

BATT_SI

0.2

BACK_UP_Vcc

BATT_SO

3.1

7677787980818283848586878889909192939495969798

BACK_UP_Vcc

FOCUS_B

ACV_SENS

BATT_SENS

FOCUS_A

XCPC_IN

USB_JACK_IN

XMC_DEAD_DET

CHARGE_INH

SYS_V

Vdd(Don’t_USE)

BATT_IN

POWER_LED

MELODY_ENV

SELFTMR_LED

XPANEL_PWM

STRB_LED

232C_ON

32KHz

BACK_UP_Vcc

XCS_MC

2.5

R470

BATTERY CHARGE DETECTOR

0.2

XMC_CS

C445

C447

GND

N.C

GND

HN1L02FU(TE85R)

C422

C423

C424

R472

Q411

3.1

IC405

TIMER CLOCK

R475 100k

D408

1SS387-TPL3

BATT_SIG

R478

R407 100k

C426

0.47u

C448

0.1u

R408

100k

C449

0.1u

C427

0.1u

R483

0.1

C432

22p

C431

0.1u

R479

10k

R480

10k

D410

1SS388(TPL3)

4.1

Q410

UN9213J-(K8).SO

LED DRIVE

R484 100k

0.5

0.4

VSS

XOUT

XSCK

5CS6

0.1

R485

FOCUS_B

FOCUS_A

USB_DET

XMC_HELP

PWR_LED

XBL_PWM

XTALLY_LED

XSTRB_LED

Q412

UN9213J-(K8).SO

LED DRIVE

X402

32.768kHz

1.6

XIN

CLK_OUT

SIO

VDD

2.9

RTS_SCK

270

SYS_V

4.1

IC405

S-3513BEFS-TB

RTS_SIO

RTS_CS

XCS_EEPROM

XHI_SCK

HI_SO

HI_SI

XEEPROM_WE

XHI_SCK

HI_SO

R486

3.1

2.5

2.2

2.5

1CS2

3DI4

SCK

IC406

EEPROM

AK6440BH-E2

IC406

RST7N.C8VCC

GND

2.5 3.2

C433

0.1u

R487

100k

BT001

LITHIUM BATTERY

XHI_SCK

HI_SO

HI-73 BOARD (1/6)

R476

3.1

0.9

1.9

2.9

3.1

0.3

3.2

3.1

2.1

3.1

UN9213J-(K8).SO

3.1

LED DRIVE

3.1

1.6

3.1

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75

X401

20MHz

Q409

3.1

2.3

0.93.5

R471 100k

4-41 4-42

HI CONTROL

HI-73 (6/6)

Page 40

DSC-F505V

DD-148 (DC/DC CONVERTER) PRINTED WIRING BOARD

– Ref. No.: DD-148 board; 2,000 series –

• For Printed Wiring Board.

• DD-148 board is six-layer print board. However, the patterns of layers 2 to 5 hav e not been included in the diagram.

• There are few cases that the part isn't mounted in this model is printed on this diagram.

• See page 4-59 for printed parts location.

• Chip parts

1-678-654-

Transistor Diode

5246

345

DC/DC CONVERTER

DD-148

1-678-654-

4-43 4-44

Page 41

DD-148 (DC/DC CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-56 for waveform.

DSC-F505V

DD-148 BOARD

DC/DC CONVERTER (DD BLOCK)

-REF.NO.:2,000 SERIESXX MARK:NO MOUNT

NO MARK:STILL/PB MODE

S:STILL MODE P:PB MODE

BT901 BATTERY TERMINAL

FLASH UNIT (MC)

CN001

(THROUGH THE

MD-97 HARNESS)

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

2SD2216J-QR(K8).SO

2SB1462J-QR(K8).SO

CPH6301-TL B+ SWITCH

R064

470k

Q017

2SD2216J-QR

(K8).SO

SWITCH

R066

33k

16151211

Q032

SWITCH

Q033

B+ SWITCH

-14.9 -14.9

C056

C059

4.7u 25V

L010

47uH

Q016

5 2

4.9

C048

4.7u

-14.9

13.4 13.4

Q030

UN9210J-(K8).SO

B- SWITCH

4.8

4.9

C050

L011 1uH

R067

47k

R068

10k

C057

4.7u

R079

3300

R078

-14.3

R077 100k

12.8

47uHL015

Q031

UN9110J-

(K8).SO

SWITCH

3.2

R031

47k

R026 220k

C058

4.7u

C052

4.7u

CN003 40P

GND

BL_UNREG

BATT_SIG

HI_UNREG

XSTRB_FULL

EVER 3.5V

STRB_CHARGE

PANEL+13.5V

SYS_DD_ON

PANEL+4.9V

LCD_DD_ON

PANEL+6.5V

A+4.9V

GND

CAM_DD_ON

M+5V

PANEL_-15V

M+5V

CAM-7.5V

D_3.2V

CAM+15V

D_3.2V

D_1.8V

A_3.2V

GND

LND002

MECA GND

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

CN707

(THROUGH THE

FP-132 FLEXIBLE)

(SEE PAGE 4-40)

DTC616DTC5

C008

0.01u

R030

2.4

1.6

R033

18k

15k

-IN(C)6

R032

10k

R029

27k

1.5

FB6

1.2

R035

39k

R036

18k

R037

68k

R038

33k

R039

10k

0.01u

C007

1.2

-IN(E)6 OUT(A)6

IC001

DC/DC CONVERTER

MB3827PFV-G-BND-ER

1.5

1.1

5600

R041

R034

R042

1.202.3

DTC7

-IN(A)6

IC001

2.5

1.2

C009

6800p

R040

R043

27k

15k

1310 14

T003

0.2

Q011 CPH3206-TL SWITCHING

<VCC=UN+1.6V>

R056

3.9

2SB1462JQR(K8).SO

S4.1/ P4.5

3.9

2SB1462JQR(K8).SO

R054

680

C020

C021

C022

C025

2.2u

C015

3300p

R055

820

C017

3300p

Q003,005,006

Q003

Q004

Q004,007,008

DRIVER

C024

3300p

R057

220

3.9

C023

2.2u

CPH3106-PM-TL

SWITCHING

C016

2.2u

CPH3106-PM-TL

SWITCHING

3.9

C018

2.2u

DRIVER

R058

5600

4.6

5.6 0.2

0.6

R060 10k

R059 3300

S5.3/ P6

0.6

R061

10k

4.6

C027

2200p

3.7

CPH5701-TL SWITCHING

100uH

C019

2.2u

R076

R048

R046

0.47u

C010

+IN(E)7

1.1

R044

12k

R045

27k

R052

27k

C011

C013

2200p

120p

3.9

2.3

0.5

0.2

1.7

1.6

R047

15k

FB7

RB7

OUT7

XEB1-6

-IN(E)7-17-IN(E)7-2

GND5.6.7

GND(0)2.3.4

6.4

0.3

1.2

C014 100p

C012

2200p

R053

18k

R049

2200

R050 1800

R051

22k

Vcc(0)5.6.7

Vss(0)4.5.6

Vcc(0)3.4

OUT2-2

OUT2-1

Vss(0)1-2

Vcc(0)1-2

OUT1-1

OUT1-2

OUT1-3

VG(0)1

6.1

4.1

OUT6

S4.4/P6.1

OUT5

5.6

OUT4

S5.3/P6

OUT3

2.3

6.1

1.9

4.1

2.3

6.1

3.1

8.4

D001

MA4ZD03001S0

C026

Q009

4.6

03.9

Q010

S4.8/ P6.1

R062

220

3.6

R063

220

Q012

CPH5701-TL

SWITCHING

3.9

2.2u

Q013

L001

1234

C028

2.2u

2SB1462JQR(K8).SO

S3.6/P3.9

Q007 2SB1462JQR(K8).SO

0.1

2SC1621-

3.2

3.9

C029

0.001u

Q005

Q006

2SC1621-

T1B3

C030

0.001u

Q008

T1B3

L002

10uH

MA3XD21001S0

XC6372C351PR

DC/DC CONVERTER

T001

DC/DC CONVERTER

L004

22uH

C035

2.2u

L005

22uH

C036

2.2u

0.1 3.9

1.8

Q019

CPH3403-TL

SWITCHING

1.9

3.2

153

Q020

CPH3403-TL SWITCHING

D002

VOUT

123

VSS

IC002

D006

MA4ZD03001S0

D004

MA4ZD03001S0

D005

MA4ZD03001S0

T002

DC/DC CONVERTER

D007

MA4ZD03001S0

3.9

4.9

231

0.2

Q021

CPH5704-TL

SWITCHING

Q022

CPH5704-TL

SWITCHING

3.9

L003

22uH

1.8

3.2

Q015 CPH5704-TL SWITCHING

3.2

6.4

RB521S-30-TE61

D003

3.8

IC002

DC/DC CONVERTER

C034

4.7u

C037

2.2u

C038

C041

C045

C042

4.7u

3.9

3.2

(STEP UP)

2.2u

C044

2.2u

Q025

UN9213J-(K8).SO

EMERGENCY

DETECT

C040

R071

27k

R072

18k

C039

C046

S0/ P4.9

C060

R069

0.1u

10k

S0/P4.9

S3.1/P0

CAMON

C043

4.7u

C032

4.7u

C033

4.7u

L016

100uH

L013

100uH

L012

100uH

2.5

Q023

CPH5601-TL

B+ SWITCH

345

C061

0.47u

R073

R070

10k

100k

Q024

XP4213-TXE

SWITCH

L006

C053

1uH

4.7u

L007

1uH

C049

4.7u

C054

4.7u 25V

L009

4.7uH

C051

4.9S4.8/P0

4.9

C047

04.9

1.5

R074

100k

3.1

R065

33k

LCDON

L014 1uH

L008 1uH

3 208

LF001

CN001

1BATT UNREG

2BATT SIG

3BATT GND

LND001

MECA GND

CN002

1ST_GND

2ST UNREG

3STRB_CHARGE

4XSTRB_FULL

R075

R001

150k

R003

100k

R004

R005

Q014

SWITCH

2SK1830-TE85L

DD ON

CAM ON

LCD ON

R002

39k

F002

1.4A/32V

F003

1.4A/32V

F004

1.4A/32V

F001

1.4A/32V

R016

47k

R012

33k

R013

22k

C004

15k

0.001u

R008

15k

27k

R006 4700

R010

C005

6800

2700p

R007

15k

R009

3.1

R011

47k

C001

0.022u B

C002

0.22u B

C003

0.1u B

R014

27k

R015

47k

R020

47k

R021

27k

R017

27k

1.6

S2.3/P0

-IN(C)5

S1.2/P0

-IN(E)5

S1.4/P0

FB5

1.2

FB4

1.2

-IN(E)4

1.5

DTC4

2.5

-IN(C)8

2.5

VREF

GND

6.1

Vcc

3.1

CTL1-4.7

S3.1/P0

CTL5

3.1

CTL6

CS1-6

CSCP

RT34CT35DTC336-IN(E)337FB338FB239-IN(E)240DTC241DTC1-442DTC1-343DTC1-144-IN(E)145FB146GND(0)147RB148OUT1-4

0.5

R022

18k

C006

R018

22k

R024

R025

R019

0.5

100p

R023

27k

R027

22k

R028

39k

22k

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié.

4-45 4-46

DC/DC CONVERTER

DD-148

Page 42

DSC-F505V

CN-121 (CONNECTION) PRINTED WIRING BOARD AND SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

– Ref. No.: CN-121 board; 1,000 series –

1-678-655-

CN-121 BOARD

CONNECTION

-REF.NO.:1,000 SERIES-

2 GND

4 CAM_-7.5V

6 M_5V

8 A_4.9V

10 A_3.2V

12 D_3.2V

14 D_1.8V

16 GND

18 CAM_SO

20 XTG_CS

22 STRB_AIN

24 GND

26 MC_D01

28 MC_D03

30 MC_D05

32 MC_D07

34 MC_D09

36 MC_D11

38 MC_D13

40 MC_D15

42 GND

44 MC_DREQ1

46 MC_DRAK1

48 IRQIMG

50 MC_XCS6

52 MC_XWE0

54 MC_XRD

56 GND

58 MC_A13

60 MC_A11

62 MC_A09

64 MC_A07

66 MC_A05

68 MC_A03

70 MC_A01

72 GND

74 SYS_V

76 XRST_SYS

78 EXT_STRB_ON

80 STRB_PHOTO_ON

82 HDO

84 GND

86 AOUT_L

88 C_OUT

90 PANEL_R-Y

92 PANEL_Y

94 CNT_C

96 GND

98 AU_LRCK

100 DAC_STBY

CN001

100P

CN601

(SEE PAGE 4-18)

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y Y/CHROMACHROMA

AUDIO

SIGNAL

REC

SY-62 BOARD (2/2)PS-434 BOARD (2/3)

CN805

(SEE PAGE 4-26)

100PCN002

2GND

4CAM_-7.5V

6M_5V

8A_4.9V

10A_3.2V

12D_3.2V

14D_1.8V

16GND

18CAM_SO

20XTG_CS

22STRB_AIN

24GND

26MC_D01

28MC_D03

30MC_D05

32MC_D07

34MC_D09

36MC_D11

38MC_D13

40MC_D15

42GND

44MC_DREQ1

46MC_DRAK1

48IRQIMG

50MC_XCS6

52MC_XWE0

54MC_XRD

56GND

58MC_A13

60MC_A11

62MC_A09

64MC_A07

66MC_A05

68MC_A03

70MC_A01

72GND

74SYS_V

76XRST_SYS

78EXT_STRB_ON

80STRB_PHOTO_ON

82HDO

84GND

86AOUT_L

88C_OUT

90PANEL_R-Y

92PANEL_Y

94CNT_C

96GND

98AU_LRCK

100DAC_STBY

1GND

3CAM_15V

5M_5V

7A_4.9V

9A_3.2V

11D_3.2V

13D_1.8V

15GND

17XCAM_SCK

19XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS

21XCAM_RESET

23GND

25MC_D00

27MC_D02

29MC_D04

31MC_D06

33MC_D08

35MC_D10

37MC_D12

39MC_D14

41MC_HCLK

43MC_DREQ0

45MC_DRAK0

47IRQJPG

49IRQAUDIO

51MC_XCS2

53MC_XWE1

55GND

57MC_A14

59MC_A12

61MC_A10

63MC_A08

65MC_A06

67MC_A04

69MC_A02

71GND

73PEARLFLD

75PAL/XNTSC

77STRB_ON

79PANEL_V

81SP_VOL

83GND

85REC_OUT

87Y_OUT

89PANEL_B-Y

91HALL_AD

93CNT_Y

95LENS_TEMP_AD

97GND

99DAC_ENB

1 GND

3 CAM_15V

5 M_5V

7 A_4.9V

9 A_3.2V

11 D_3.2V

13 D_1.8V

15 GND

17 XCAM_SCK

19 XEAGLE/XGCAM_CS

21 XCAM_RESET

23 GND

25 MC_D00

27 MC_D02

29 MC_D04

31 MC_D06

33 MC_D08

35 MC_D10

37 MC_D12

39 MC_D14

41 MC_HCLK

43 MC_DREQ0

45 MC_DRAK0

47 IRQJPG

49 IRQAUDIO

51 MC_XCS2

53 MC_XWE1

55 GND

57 MC_A14

59 MC_A12

61 MC_A10

63 MC_A08

65 MC_A06

67 MC_A04

69 MC_A02

71 GND

73 PEARLFLD

75 PAL/XNTSC

77 STRB_ON

79 PANEL_V

81 SP_VOL

83 GND

85 REC_OUT

87 Y_OUT

89 PANEL_B-Y

91 HALL_AD

93 CNT_Y

95 LENS_TEMP_AD

97 GND

99 DAC_ENB

CONNECTION

CN-121

1-678-655-

4-47 4-48

Page 43

FK (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

DSC-F505V

10 11

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (FK) is replaced as a block. so that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

REG_GND

ZOOM_SW_AD

D_3.2V

XSTRB_LED

REG_GND

LANC_DC

LANC_SIG

XLANC_JACK_IN

REG_GND

KEY_AD1

KEY_AD2

HI-73 BOARD (6/6)

(SEE PAGE 4-41)

R9003

R9002

R9001

CN705

R9011

RV001

D006

(FLASH LAMP)

LEFT

COM1

COMMON

S001

R004

R005

(ZOOM)

(CONTROL BUTTON)

8 COM3

COM2

1800

2700

SETUP 7

RIGHT 6

DOWN

R007 2700

D004

RD8.2UM-T1B2B3

D005

RD8.2UM-T1B2B3

R008 4700

R9009

S004

DISPLAY

S002

(FLASH)

R011

4700

R010

6800

PROGRAM AE

S003

S005

R9008

R9007

LCD

BRIGHT(+) BRIGHT(-)

R012

39k

R013 6800

S006

LCD BACK LIGHT

1SS387-TPL3

S007

LCD

OFFON

D009

R9012

R9010

R9006

R014

100

30PCN001

REG_GND

PANEL_COM

KEY_AD3

HI_UNREG

LANC_IN

LANC_OUT

EXT_STRB_ON

HSY

RXD

RESET

VDD

TXD

PF7

R002 1800

R003

330

TLYU1008(T05,SOY)

LND002

STATIC_GND

REG_GND

HSY

PANEL_COM

HI_UNREG

LANC_IN

LANC_OUT

PF7

TXD

RXD

RESET

VDD

18PCN002

CPC

(FOR CHECK)

CL9001

J9001

(EXT FLASH)

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

CHROMA

REC

D9002

-(TX).SO

R9013

470k

D9003

MA4Z082WA

-(TX).SO

FB9002

FB9003

FB9004

FB9005

D9004

MA4Z082WA-(TX).SO

1SS387-TPL3

FB9001

D9005

STATIC_GND

LND001

R9004

R9005

D9001

MA4Z082WA

-(TX).SO

MA4Z082WA

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK

4-49 4-50

Page 44

DSC-F505V

R001 4700

R002 100k

D003

D002

U05NU44

C001

10V

22u

C002

0.01u

R003

100

R004

C003

R005

22k

Q002

2SB1073-R-TX

Q003

2SB1073-R-TX

Q001

UN5213-TX

D001

MA111-(K8).S0

R7 330

R006

XN1211-TX

Q006

C008

L001

2.2uH

C013 10u

R018 4700

CN002

1 DC_300V

2 REG_GND

T001

160uF

C009

330V

CN001

ST_GND

ST_UNREG

STRB_CHARGE

XSTRB_FULL

CL001

CL002

CL003

CL004

CL005

CL006

CL008

CL007

CL020

CL019

FC0300L

3564

FLASH UNIT (MC)

FLASH UNIT (MC) is replaced as a block. So that this PRINTED BOARD is omitted.

CN002

DD-148 BOARD

(THROUGH THE

MD-97 HARNESS)

(SEE PAGE 4-45)

B+ SWITCH

SWITCHING

TRANS DRIVE

FLASH

CHARGE

DETECTOR

(THROUGH THE

MS-114 HARNESS)

CN003

FLASH UNIT (ST)

(SEE PAGE 4-51)

78 9

CF (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK)/MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK, ST (FLASH UNIT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS PW (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK), MC (FLASH UNIT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF)/MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK is replaced as a block. so that this PRINTED BOARD is omitted.

SY-62 BOARD (2/2)

CN803

(SEE PAGE 4-26)

D_3.2V

FOCUS_A

FOCUS_B

REG_GND

PHOTOTR_OUT

PHOTOTR_5V

REG_GND

D_3.2V

KEY_AD4

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (CF)

CN002

10P

R006

10k

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PW)

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK (PW) is replaced as a block. so that this PRINTED WIRING BOARD is omitted.

MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK

CN001

REG_GND

FOUCUS_B

FOUCUS_A

D_3.2V

S002

S003S002

WHT-BALSPOT_METER

R003 4700

S003

PHOTOTR_5V

PHOTOTR_OUT

S001

MACRO

R001 1800

R002 2700

S001

CN004

PHOTOTR_5V

PHOTOTR_OUT

REG_GND

FOUCUS_B

FOUCUS_A

D_3.2V

R004

6800

(W/B SET)

S004

S005

R005

39k

S004

LND1

STATIC GND

Q004

PN126S-R

(BRIGHT LEVEL

SENSOR)

S005

FOCUS

AUTO

MANUAL

C004 2200p

(FAR)

RV2

(MANUAL FOCUS)

RV1

(NEAR)

HI-73 BOARD (5/6)

CN704

(SEE PAGE 4-40)

21P

CN001

REG_GND

D+

D-

REG_GND

USB_DET

REG_GND

V OUT

REG_GND

AU OUT

AV JACK IN

REG_GND

POWER_LED

SELF_LED

D_3.2V

XPWER_SW

REG_GND

XSHTR_LOCK_SW

XSHTR_SW

MOVIE/XSTILL_SW

XCAM/PB_SW

LND001

STATIC_GND

R001 330k

D008

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

MOVIE

LND003

D002

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

LF001

LF002

D003

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

R006

1SS387-TPL3

D016

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

STILLMOVIE

COM

LND004

R005

10k

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

D015

R003

680

PLAYS001

D004

TLSU1008(T05,SOY)

(REC LED (RED))

SB-U5338(Rec LED)

PLAY

LND002

D009

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

D017

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

R002

220k

R007

D014

C001

0.1u

R004

330

TLGU1008(T05,SOY)

(POWER LED (GREEN))

S003

01ZA8.2(TPL3)

SB-L5749

S002

S002,S107 (SHUTTER)

D010

D007

S003

POWER ON/OFF

CN002

1 VCC

2D-

3D+

4 GND

J001

A/V OUT (MONO)

(1st)

S107

(2nd)

DIGITAL

I/O

R008

SIGNAL PATH

VIDEO SIGNAL

Y/CHROMA

AUDIO

SIGNAL

REC

FLASH UNIT (ST)

FLASH UNIT (ST) is replaced as a block.

CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK/FLASH UNIT

So that this PRINTED BOARD is omitted.

CN003

CN004

FLASH UNIT (MC)

CN002

(THROUGH THE

MS-114 HARNESS)

(SEE PAGE 4-52)

SY-62 BOARD (2/2)

CN804

(THROUGH THE

FP-136 FLEXIBLE)

(SEE PAGE 4-26)

CF, PW ST, MC

XSTB_OPEN

2DC_300V

1REG_GND

(OPEN (FLASH) SWITCH)

CL018

CL017

CL016

CL015

CL014

CL013

A_4.9V

STRB

GND

S001

CL009 CL010

CL011

CL012

S001

Q008

UN5111-TX

B+ SWITCH

Q007

XN1211-TX

SWITCHING FLASH DRIVE FLASH SWITCH

R014

C011

0.047u

Q011

2SD1819A-QRS-TX

R015

150

R012

R013

4-51

564

R016

4.7M

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une piéce portant le numéro spécifié.

0.033uF/330V

L002

KP-92

C012

XE_H

LND005

LND006

XE_L

Q009

CY25AAJ-8

4-52

Page 45

4-3. WAVEFORMS

CD-283 BOARD

125 µsec

IC101 1, 2, 3

125 µsec

IC101 4, 5, 6

125 µsec

IC101 0

7.6 Vp-p

1.1 Vp-p

3.8 Vp-p

112 nsec

IC103 1 – qs

18 MHz

IC103 qh

IC103 wa, ws

3.9 Vp-p

4 Vp-p

4.4 Vp-p

3.2 Vp-p

HI-73 BOARD

IC803 8

IC803 9

IC803 0

0.5 Vp-p

0.25 Vp-p

0.22 Vp-p

5 Vp-p

IC901 3

IC901 4

11.7 MHz IC901 wh

5 Vp-p

4.7 Vp-p

3.2 Vp-p

32.768 kHz IC405 1

56 nsec

36.81 MHz (NTSC)

36.56 MHz (PAL)

IC101 qs

IC101 qd, qf, ql, w;

IC102 wh

18 MHz

IC102 e;

7.6 Vp-p

3 Vp-p

4 Vp-p

3.2 Vp-p

125 µsec

IC103 wd

IC103 e;

1.2 Vp-p

IC803 qf

5 Vp-p

IC803 w;

5 Vp-p

IC803 ws

5 Vp-p

IC803 wf

1.2 Vp-p

IC901 ej

4.5 Vp-p

IC902 7

0.5 Vp-p

IC651 2

2.1 Vp-p

IC651 9

0.6 Vp-p

IC102 ef

3.2 Vp-p

IC102 eg

4-53

IC803 ra

5 Vp-p

IC901 2

IC651 qf

4 Vp-p

20 MHz

IC404 r;

4-55

Page 46

4-4. PARTS LOCATION

DD-148 BOARD

495 kHz

IC001 1

1.2 Vp-p

CD-283 BOARD (SIDE A)

C102 A-2 C103 B-2 C104 B-2 C105 B-3 C106 B-2 C107 B-2 C108 B-2 C109 B-2 C110 C-2 C111 C-1 C112 C-2 C113 A-3 C115 C-3 C116 B-3 C117 B-3 C118 B-3 C119 A-2 C120 A-2 C121 A-2 C122 A-2 C123 A-3 C124 A-2 C125 A-2 C126 A-2 C127 B-3 C128 C-3 C129 A-2 C130 A-2 C131 A-2 C132 A-2 C133 C-3 C134 B-2 C135 A-1 C136 C-3 C138 B-2 C139 C-3 C140 B-3 C141 C-2

CN101 B-1 D101 C-2

D102 A-2 FB101 C-1

FB104 B-3 FB106 B-3 FB107 A-1 FB108 B-1 FB109 B-1 FB110 B-3 FB111 C-3 FB113 C-3 FB114 C-3

IC102 B-3 IC103 A-2

L101 C-2 Q101 A-3

Q102 B-2 Q103 B-3

R101 A-3 R102 B-2 R104 B-2 R105 B-2 R106 B-1 R107 B-2 R108 B-2 R112 A-3 R113 B-2 R114 B-3 R115 B-3 R119 B-3 R126 A-1 R128 A-1 R129 B-1 R138 C-2 R139 A-1 R140 A-1 R141 A-1 R142 A-1 R143 A-1 R144 A-1 R145 A-1 R146 A-1 R147 A-1 R148 A-1 R149 A-1 R150 A-1 R152 B-1

X102 A-3

CD-283 BOARD (SIDE B)

C114 C-3 C137 A-2

FB103 C-3 FB105 C-3

L102 C-3 L103 A-2 L104 C-3

X101 A-3

HI-73 BOARD (SIDE A)

BT001 A-1 C253 C-3

C254 C-4 C258 C-4 C259 C-4 C260 C-4 C261 C-4 C262 B-4 C263 C-4 C264 C-4 C265 C-4 C266 C-4 C267 C-4 C269 C-4 C271 B-4 C274 C-4 C278 B-3 C279 B-3 C280 B-3 C282 C-3 C283 C-3 C285 C-3 C286 B-3 C287 B-3 C288 C-4 C289 C-3 C290 C-3 C291 B-3 C292 B-3 C294 C-3 C297 B-3 C298 C-3 C299 B-3 C401 B-3 C402 A-3 C409 B-1 C410 B-1 C411 C-2 C417 B-1 C418 C-1 C426 C-2 C427 C-2 C431 C-2 C432 C-1 C433 C-1 C440 A-2 C441 A-2 C442 D-2 C443 C-2 C446 B-2 C448 C-2 C449 C-2 C601 B-4 C651 C-6 C652 C-5 C653 C-5 C654 D-5 C655 C-5 C656 C-5 C657 D-5 C658 C-5 C659 D-5 C660 D-5 C661 D-5 C662 C-6 C663 C-6 C664 C-6 C801 A-6 C802 A-6 C803 B-6 C804 B-6 C805 B-6 C806 A-6 C807 B-5 C808 B-5 C810 B-5 C811 A-6 C812 B-6 C813 B-6 C814 B-6 C815 B-6 C816 B-6 C903 A-4 C905 A-4 C906 A-5 C907 A-5 C908 A-5 C909 A-5 C911 A-5 C913 A-4 C917 A-3 C918 A-3

CN252 D-2 CN701 B-5 CN702 C-5 CN705 A-2

CN706 D-1 CN707 C-3 CN901 A-3

D401 B-2 D406 B-2 D408 C-1 D410 C-2 D701 B-6 D903 A-5

FB601 A-4 IC253 C-4

IC401 B-3 IC402 C-2 IC404 B-2 IC405 C-2 IC406 C-1 IC407 D-2 IC408 C-2 IC601 B-4 IC651 C-5 IC801 A-5 IC803 B-5 IC901 A-4

L254 D-4 L401 D-2 L651 B-6 L652 C-5 L801 A-6 L802 B-6 L905 A-5

Q254 B-3 Q255 B-3 Q401 A-1 Q405 A-2 Q406 B-1 Q409 C-1 Q410 C-1 Q411 C-1 Q412 C-1 Q413 A-3 Q601 B-4 Q651 C-6 Q652 C-6 Q701 B-6 Q704 D-1 Q705 D-2 Q707 A-3 Q708 A-3

R251 B-4 R254 C-4 R255 C-4 R256 C-4 R259 C-4 R260 C-4 R262 B-4 R263 B-4 R265 B-4 R266 B-4 R270 B-4 R271 B-4 R272 B-4 R273 C-4 R277 C-3 R280 B-3 R281 C-4 R282 C-3 R283 B-3 R284 B-3 R285 B-3 R286 C-4 R287 B-3 R288 C-3 R291 D-2 R292 D-2 R401 A-1 R402 A-1 R404 B-1 R405 A-3 R406 B-3 R407 C-2 R408 C-2 R420 A-2 R422 B-1 R423 A-2 R425 B-1 R426 A-2 R427 B-1 R428 B-1 R429 B-1 R430 A-2 R431 A-2 R432 B-2

R433 B-2 R434 B-2 R435 B-2 R436 B-2 R437 B-1 R438 B-2 R439 B-2 R444 B-1 R445 B-1 R446 C-1 R447 C-1 R448 C-1 R449 B-1 R450 B-2 R451 B-1 R452 B-3 R453 B-2 R454 B-2 R455 B-2 R462 C-3 R463 C-3 R464 C-1 R465 C-3 R466 C-3 R467 C-3 R468 C-3 R469 A-2 R470 B-1 R471 C-1 R472 C-2 R475 C-1 R476 C-2 R478 C-2 R479 D-2 R480 D-2 R483 C-2 R484 C-1 R485 C-2 R487 C-1 R489 C-2 R490 A-2 R491 C-3 R492 C-3 R493 C-3 R494 C-3 R495 B-1 R496 A-1 R497 A-1 R603 B-3 R604 B-4 R605 B-4 R606 B-4 R607 B-4 R608 B-4 R651 C-5 R652 C-5 R653 D-5 R654 D-5 R655 D-6 R656 C-6 R657 C-6 R658 C-6 R701 A-6 R706 D-2 R708 B-5 R709 A-3 R802 B-5 R803 B-5 R804 B-5 R807 A-5 R808 A-5 R809 A-5 R812 A-5 R813 A-5 R815 B-6 R816 B-5 R820 C-5 R821 C-5 R822 C-5 R905 A-5 R908 A-5 R912 A-4 R913 A-5 R914 A-5 R915 A-5 R916 A-5 R918 A-5 R920 A-4 R921 A-5 R922 A-5 R924 A-4 R926 A-5 R940 A-5 R941 A-3 R942 A-3 R943 A-3 R944 A-3 R967 A-3

R968 A-3 R969 A-3 R978 A-5 R979 A-5 R981 A-5

SE401 A-1 X401 B-1

X402 D-1

HI-73 BOARD (SIDE B)

C255 D-4 C281 D-4 C293 D-3 C295 D-3 C702 B-1 C703 B-1 C704 C-1 C705 C-1 C706 C-1 C707 D-1 C708 D-1 C902 A-2 C904 A-2 C915 A-6 C916 A-3 C919 A-3 C920 A-3

CN251 A-3 CN703 B-4 CN704 A-4

D703 B-1 D705 C-1 D904 A-3

FB703 A-5 FB704 A-5 FB705 A-4

IC701 D-1 IC902 A-5

L252 D-4 L255 D-3 L701 C-1 L703 D-2 L704 D-1 L901 A-2 L902 A-2 L903 A-2

Q253 D-3 Q702 C-1 Q703 B-1 Q706 D-1 Q903 A-6 Q904 A-6 Q905 A-6 Q906 A-6

R279 D-4 R289 A-3 R290 A-3 R702 C-1 R703 A-5 R704 B-1 R705 B-1 R929 A-6 R930 A-6 R932 A-6 R933 A-6 R938 A-6 R939 A-6

4-56

4-58

Page 47

DD-148 BOARD (SIDE A)

C014 A-2 C015 A-3 C016 A-3 C017 A-3 C018 A-3 C019 B-5 C023 A-5 C025 B-2 C026 B-2 C027 B-5 C028 B-2 C029 A-4 C032 B-5 C034 A-5 C035 A-4 C036 A-5 C039 B-4 C040 A-3 C042 A-3 C043 A-5 C045 A-3

CN001 A-2 CN002 B-1

D001 B-2 D007 B-4

F001 A-1 F002 A-1 F003 A-1 F004 A-1

IC002 A-5 L001 A-5

L002 A-5 L003 B-5 L004 A-4 L005 A-5

LF001 A-1 Q003 A-3

Q005 A-4 Q006 A-4 Q009 A-3 Q010 A-3 Q011 B-2 Q012 B-5 Q021 A-4 Q022 A-5 Q025 B-4

R053 A-2 R055 A-3 R056 A-3 R058 A-3 R060 B-4 R062 A-4 R071 B-4 R072 B-4 R075 A-2

T001 A-3 T002 B-3 T003 B-3

DD-148 BOARD (SIDE B)

C001 A-1 C002 A-1 C003 A-1 C004 B-1 C005 B-1 C006 A-1 C007 B-1 C008 A-1 C009 A-1 C010 B-2 C011 B-2 C012 A-2 C013 B-2 C022 A-5 C024 B-5 C030 A-4 C033 A-5 C037 B-2 C038 B-2 C041 A-3 C044 A-3 C048 B-5 C049 A-5 C050 B-4 C051 A-3 C052 A-4 C053 A-5 C054 A-3 C056 A-3 C057 B-5 C058 B-4 C059 A-3 C060 A-4 C061 A-4

CN003 B-3 D002 A-5

D003 A-5 D004 A-3 D005 A-3 D006 B-2

IC001 A-1 L006 A-5

L007 A-5 L008 B-5 L009 A-3 L010 B-4 L011 A-4 L012 A-3 L013 A-3 L014 B-5 L015 A-4 L016 A-3

Q004 A-4 Q007 A-5 Q008 A-5 Q013 A-5 Q014 A-1 Q015 A-5 Q016 B-4 Q017 B-4 Q019 B-5 Q020 A-5 Q023 A-4 Q024 A-4 Q030 B-3 Q031 B-3 Q032 B-3 Q033 B-3

R001 B-1 R002 A-1 R003 B-1 R004 B-1 R005 B-1 R006 B-1 R007 B-1 R008 B-1 R010 B-1 R011 A-1 R012 A-1 R013 A-1 R014 A-1 R015 A-1 R016 B-1 R017 B-1 R018 A-2 R020 B-1 R021 B-1 R022 A-1 R023 A-2 R024 A-2 R025 A-2 R026 B-3

R027 A-2 R028 A-2 R029 B-1 R030 A-1 R031 B-4 R032 B-2 R033 A-1 R034 A-1 R035 A-1 R036 B-2 R037 B-2 R038 B-2 R039 B-2 R040 A-1 R041 A-1 R042 A-1 R043 A-1 R044 A-2 R045 A-2 R046 B-2 R047 A-2 R049 A-2 R050 A-2 R051 A-2 R052 B-2 R054 A-5 R057 B-5 R059 A-4 R061 A-5 R063 A-4 R064 A-4 R065 B-4 R066 B-4 R067 B-4 R068 B-4 R069 A-4 R070 A-4 R073 A-4 R074 A-4 R076 B-2 R077 B-3 R078 B-3 R079 B-3

4-59 E

Page 48

Before starting adjustment

EVR Data Re-writing Procedure When Replacing Board

The data that is stored in the repair board, is not necessarily correct. Perform either procedure 1 or procedure 2 or procedure 3 when replacing board.

Procedure 1

Save the EVR data of the machine in which a board is going to be replaced. Download the saved data after a board is replaced.

DSC-F505V

SECTION 5

ADJUSTMENTS

(Machine before starting repair)

Save the EVR data to a personal computer.

PC PC

(Machine after a board is replaced)

Download the saved data to a machine.

Procedure 2

Remove the EEPROM from the board of the machine tha t is going to be repaired. Install the removed EEPR OM to the replaced board.

Remove the EEPROM and install it.

(Former board)

(New board)

Procedure 3

When the data cannot be saved due to defective EEPROM, or when the EEPROM cannot be removed or installed, save the data from the same model of the same destination, and download it.

(Machine to be repaired)

Download the data.

Save the data.

(The same model of the same destination)

After the EVR data is saved and downloaded, check the respective items of the EVR data. (Refer to page 5-2 for the items to be checked.)

(Machine to be repaired)PC

5-1

Page 49

1-1. Adjusting items when replacing main parts and boards

When replacing main parts and boards, adjust the items indicated by z in the following table.

Block Mounted parts Board

replacement replacement replacement

Replaced parts

Adjustment section Adjustment

Initialization of 7, B, D, E, F, page data

Video Video sync level adj.

Camera Hall adj.

LCD LCD initial data input

System control Battery down adj.

Initialization of D page data Initialization of 7, B, E, F page data

Video burst level adj.

Flange back adj. F No. standard data input Mechanical shutter adj. Light level adj. Mixed color cancel adj. Auto white balance standard data input Auto white balance ND filter compensation Auto white balance adj. Color reproduction adj. Strobe white balance adj. CCD (black and white) defect compensation

VCO adj. D range adj. Bright adj. Contrast adj. Color adj. V-COM level adj. V-COM adj. White balance adj.

ZOOM-VR center adj.

(LCD panel)

(Back light unit)

(CCD imager)

(S/H, AGC, A/D)

(EVR)

(VIDEO AMP)

(LCD drive)

(LCD Timing generator)

(EVR)

(Flash unit)

(Control switch block)

LCD901

ND901

IC101

IC103

IC406

IC651

IC803

IC901

IC801

(COMPLETE)

Lens device

MC block

ST block

FK block

LCD block

CD-283 board

PS-434 board

HI-73 board

CD-283 board

PS-434 board

zz zzzz

zzzzz

zz zzz

zzzzzz

zz z z z

zz zzz zzz z

zzzz

zz z z

zz zz

zzzzz

zz zz zz

zzz

(EEPROM)

(COMPLETE)

IC507

SY-62 board

HI-73 board

SY-62 board

(EEPROM)

IC406

HI-73 board

Table 5-1-1

5-2

Page 50

5-1. CAMERA SECTION ADJUSTMENT

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

1-1-1. List of Service Tools

• Oscilloscope • Color monitor • Vectorscope

• Regulated power supply • Digital voltmeter

Ref. No.

J-1

Filter for color temperature correction (C14)

J-2

Pattern box PTB-450

J-3

Color bar chart for pattern box Adjustment remote commander (RM-95 upgraded).

J-4

(Note 1)

J-5

Siemens star chart

J-6

Clear chart for pattern box

J-7

CPC-9 jig (Note 2)

J-8

Mini pattern box

J-9

Extension cable (39P, 0.3 mm)

J-10

Extension cable (39P, 0.3 mm)

J-11

Back ground paper

Note 1: If the micro processor IC in the adjustment remote

commander is not the new micro processor (UPD7503GC56-12), The pages cannot be switched. In this case, replace with the new micro processor (8-759-148-35).

J-1 J-5J-2

Name

J-3 J-4

Parts Code

J-6080-058-A J-6082-200-A

J-6020-250-A J-6082-053-B J-6080-875-A

J-6080-621-A J-6082-393-C J-6082-353-B

J-6082-448-A

1-678-657-11 J-2501-130-A

Auto white balance adjustment/check White balance adjustment/check

For checking the flange back

For connecting the adjustment remote commander For adjusting the LCD block

For adjusting the flange back For extension between the CD-283 board (CN101) and

the PS-434 board (CN602) For extension between the HI-73 board (CN701, 702) and

the SY-62 board (CN801, 802) For adjusting the strobe

Note 2: The old CPC-9 jig (Parts code: J-6082-393-B) cannot be

used, because it cannot operate the adjustment remote commander.

Usage

J-6 J-7

J-11

J-8 J-9 J-10

Fig. 5-1-1

5-3

Page 51

1-1-2. Preparations Note 1: For details of how remove the cabinet and boards, refer

to “2. DISASSEMBLY”.

Note 2: When performing only the adjustments, the lens block

and boards need not be disassemble.

1) Connect the equipment for adjustments according to Fig. 5-1-

2) Connect the Adjusting remote commander to FK (control switch block) CN002 via CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C). (See Fig. 5-1-3)

Note 3: Setting the “Forced STILL mode power ON” Mode

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander. The Above procedure will enable the camera power to be turned on. After completing adjustments, be sure to exit the “Forced STILL mode power ON Mode”.

Note 4: Exiting the “Forced STILL mode power ON Mode”

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: D, address: 10, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

1-1-3. Discharging of the flashlight power supply

The capacitor which is used as power supply of flashlight is charged with 200 V to 300 V voltage. Discharge this voltage before starting adjustments in order to protect service engineers from electric shock during adjustment.

Discharge procedure

1. Press the FLASH button (FK block S002) and turn off the FLASH LED (FK block D006).

2. Fabricate the discharging jig as shown in Fig. 5-1-5 locally by yourself. Connect the discharging jig to the positive (+) and negative (–) terminal of the flash voltag e charge capacitor . Allow ten seconds to discharge the voltage.

Flash unit (MC)

Pattern box

About 90 cm

Front of the lens

Fig. 5-1-2

FK (Control switch block) (CN002)

Two claws

Note 1: Don't use the 12 pin flexible board of CPC-9 jig.

It causes damage to the unit.

Note 2: The old CPC-9 jig (Parts code: J-6082-393-B)

cannot be used, because it cannot operate the adjustment remote commander.

CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) (18p flexible board)

CPC cover

Capacitor

Fig. 5-1-4

Fig. 5-1-5

R: 1 kΩ/1 W (Part code: 1-215-869-11)

1 kΩ/1 W

Wrap insulating tape.

Release knob

Slide the Release knob in the direction of arrow A. To open the Battery lid.

Fig. 5-1-3

5-4

Page 52

Extension cable (39P, 0.3 mm) (J-6082-448-A)

CN602

PS-434 board

CN401

CN601

CN801

CN802

CD-283 board

CN101

Lens block

CN803

CN805

Control switch block (CF)

SY-62 board

CN804

Manual focus block

Video (yellow)

Audio (black)

Color monitor

Vectorscope

Terminated

75 Ω

To HI-73 board, CN252

To HI-73 board, CN706

Control switch block (FK)

CN002

CPC-9 jig (Note)

(J-6082-393-C)

Regulated power supply

(6.0 to 7.2 Vdc)

AC power adaptor

Adjustment

remote commander

Battery holder

DD-148 board

CN001

CN003

CN002

CN706

CN252

Flash unit (ST)

Extension cable (39P, 0.3 mm) (1-678-657-11)

Color LCD unit

Inverter transformer unit

To Flash unit (MC) CN002

A/V out jack

To MIC unit (MIC901)

To Control switch block (PW)

CN705

CN901

CN704

CN251

CN701

CN702

To Flash unit (MC) CN001

Memory stick

Note: The old CPC-9 jig (Parts code: J-6082-393-B)

cannot be used, because it cannot operate the adjustment remote commander.

CN707

HI-73 board

Fig. 5-1-6

5-5

Page 53

1-1-4. Precautions

1. Setting the Switch

Unless otherwise specified, set the switches as follows and perform adjustments.

1. FOCUS button (CF block S005) ......................... MANUAL

2. PROGRAM AE button (FK block S003)

...................................... AUTO (No mark indicated on LCD)

3. DISPLAY button (FK block S004) ..................... OSD OFF

4. P. EFFECT (Menu display) ................................. OFF

2. Order of Adjustments

Basically carry out adjustments in the order given.

5. DEMO (Menu display) ........................................ OFF

6. VIDEO OUT (Menu display) .............................. NTSC

7. WHITE BALANCE (Menu display)................... AUTO

8. EXPOSURE ......................................................... 0EV

9. FLASH LEVEL ................................................... NORMAL

Color bar chart (Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Yellow

Cyan

White

Magenta

Green

AB B

A=B

Red

Blue

Enlargement

3. Subjects

1) Color bar chart (Standard picture frame). When performing adjustments using the color bar chart, adjust the picture frame as shown in Fig. 5-1-7. (Standard picture frame)

2) Clear chart (Standard picture frame) Remove the color bar chart from the pattern box and insert a clear chart in its place. (Do not perform zoom operations during this time)

C=D

Difference in level

Fig. 5-1-7

Electronic beam scanning frame

Red

Cyan

White

Green

Yellow

Fig. b (monitor TV picture)

Adjust the camera zoom and direction to obtain the output waveform shown in Fig a and the monitor TV display shown in Fig. b.

Magenta

Blue

CRT picture frame

5-6

Page 54

4. Preparing the Flash Adjustment Box

A dark room is required to provide an accurate flash adjustment. If it is not available, prepare the flash adjustment box as given below;

1) Provide woody board A, B and C of 15 mm thickness.

woody board A (2)

530 mm

1026 mm 1026 mm 1000 mm

woody board B (2)

Fig. 5-1-8

2) Apply black mat paint to one side of woody board A and B.

3) Attach background paper (J-2501-130-A) to woody board C.

4) Assemble so that the black sides and the background paper side of woody board A, B and C are internal. (Fig 5-1-9)

500 mm

1000 mm1030 mm

woody board A

woody board C (1)

1000 mm

woody board B

woody board A

woody board B

woody board C

Fig. 5-1-9

5-7

Page 55

1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7 PAGE DATA

1-2-1. INITIALIZATION OF D PAGE DATA

1. Initializing D Pag e Data Note: If the D page data has been initialized, the following

adjustments need to be performed again.

1) Modification of D page data

2) LCD system adjustments

3) Battery end adjustments

Adjusting page D Adjusting Address 10 to EF

Initializing Method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 2, address: 03, and set data: 08.

3) Select page: 2, address: 00, and set data: 2D.

4) Select page: 2, address: 01, set data: 2D, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

5) Select page: 2, address: 02, and check that the data changes to “01”.

6) Perform “Modification of D Page Data”.

2. Modification of D Page Data

If the D page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed data-2” address shown in the following table by manual input.

Modifying Method:

1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because

they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note : If copy the data built in the different model, the

camcorder may not operate.

3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.

4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value.

Processing after Completing Modification of D Page data

1) Select page: 2, address: 00, and set data: 29.

2) Select page: 2, address: 01, and set data: 29, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

3. D Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.

(Refer to “1. Initializing D Page Data”)

Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.

(Refer to “2. Modification of D Page Data”)

Address Initial value Remark

00 to 0F

10 00 Test mode

11 to 42 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

43 Fixed data-2

44 to 61 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

62 Fixed data-2 63

64 to 7C F ixed data-1 (Initialized data)

7D Fixed data-2

7E to 85 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

86 Fixed data-2 87 88 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

89 80 ZOOM-VR center adj. 8A Fixed data-2 8B

8C to 8F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

90 80 Battery down adj.

91 88

92 AD

93 C2

94 CD

95 to 97 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

98 Fixed data-2

99 9A 9B 9C 9D

9F A0 A1 A2 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) A3 Fixed data-2 A4 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) A5 Fixed data-2

A6 to CF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

D0 BC Bright adj. D1 80 Color adj. D2 B9 White balance adj. D3 B7 D4 BE Contrast adj. D5 C8 D Range adj. D6 7C V-COM Level adj. D7 80 VCO adj. (NTSC) D8 74 V-COM adj.

D9 to DC Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

DD 88 VCO adj. (PAL)

DE to EF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

5-8

Page 56

1-2-2. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data

1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data Note: If the B, E, F Page data has been initialized, “Modification

of B, E, F, 7 Page Data” and following adjustments need to be performed again.

1) Modification of B, E, F, 7 page data

2) Video system adjustments

3) Camera system adjustments

Adjusting page F Adjusting Address 10 to FF Adjusting page E Adjusting Address 00 to FF Adjusting page B Adjusting Address 00 to FF Adjusting page 7 Adjusting Address 00 to FF

Initializing Method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: B, address: 0C, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button of the adjustment remote commander.

3) Select page: 6, address: 03, and set data: 08.

4) Select page: 6, address: 00, and set data: 2D.

5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 2D, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

6) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data changes to “01”.

7) Perform “Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”.

3. B Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.

(Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”)

Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.

(Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”)

Address Initial value Remar k

00 Fixed data-2

01 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

4. E Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data.

(Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”)

Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data.

(Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”)

Address Initial value Remar k

00 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data

If the B, E, F, 7 Page data has been initialized, change the data of the “Fixed da ta-2” address shown in the following tables by manual input.

Modifying Method:

1) Before changing the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) New data for changing are not shown in the tables because they are different in destination. When changing the data, copy the data built in the same model. Note: If copy the data built in the different model, the

camcorder may not operate.

3) When changing the data, press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander each time when setting new data to write the data in the non-volatile memory.

4) Check that the data of adjustment addresses is the initial value. If not, change the data to the initial value.

Processing after Completing Modification of B, E, F , 7 P age data

1) Select page: 2, address: 00, and set data: 29.

2) Select page: 2, address: 01, and set data: 29, and press the PAUSE button of the adjustment remote commander.

5-9

Page 57

5. F Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”)

Address Initial value Remar k

00 to 0F

10 to13 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

14 1C Flange back adj. 15 94 16 26 17 EC 18 13

19 B9 1A 00 1B 00 1C 00 1D 00 1E 46

1F 00

20 20

21 20

22 20

23 44

24 0A

25 00

26 85 Light level adj.

27 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

28 94 Light level adj.

29 47 F No. standard data input 2A 41 2B 3D 2C 3D 2D 3B 2E 80 Hall adj.

2F 93

30 to 33 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

34 15 Hall adj.

35 7C

36 to 39 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

3A 2F Auto white balance standard data input 3B 37 3C 40 3D D0 3E Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

3F B5 Auto white balance adj.

40 43

41 03 Color reproduction adj.

42 E9

43 63

44 83

45 D5

46 FE

47 73

48 45

49 to 4C Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

4D 27 Strobe white balance adj. 4E 77

4F 00 Auto white balance ND filter

50 00 compensation adj.

Address Initial value Remar k

51 03 Color reproduction adj. 52 E9 (with ND filter) 53 63 54 83 55 D5 56 FE 57 73 58 45

59 00 Auto white balance standard data input 5A 14 Mechanical shutter adj. 5B Fixed data-1 (Initialized data) 5C 63 Color reproduction adj. 5D 83

5E 03

5F E9

60 63 Color reproduction adj.

61 83 (with ND filter)

62 03

63 E9

64 10 Strobe white balance adj.

65 61 Video sync level adj.

66 61 Video burst level adj.

67, 68 Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

69 01 Strobe white balance adj. 6A A3 6B B4 6C 0B Mechanical shutter adj. 6D C2

6E 09

6F 42

70 06

71 C2

72 05

73 C2

74 04

75 C2

76 33

77 33

78 33

79 33 7A 33 7B 33 7C 33 7D 33

7E 33

7F 33

80 00 Auto white balance adj.

81 to 9F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

A0 00 Mixed color cancel adj. A1 00 A2 00 A3 00

A4 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

5-10

Page 58

6. 7 Page Table Note 1: Fixed data-1: Initialized data. (Refer to “1. Initializing B, E, F, 7 Page Data”) Note 2: Fixed data-2: Modified data. (Refer to “2. Modification of B, E, F, 7 Page Data”)

Address Initial value Remar k

00 to 5F Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

60 0F CCD black defect compensation 61 FF 62 0F 63 FF 64 0F 65 FF 66 0F 67 FF 68 0F

69 FF 6A 0F 6B FF 6C 0F 6D FF 6E 0F

6F FF

70 0F

71 FF

72 0F

73 FF

74 0F

75 FF

76 0F

77 FF

78 0F

79 FF 7A 0F 7B FF 7C 0F 7D FF 7E 0F

7F FF

80 0F

81 FF

82 0F

83 FF

84 0F

85 FF

86 0F

87 FF

88 0F CCD white defect compensation

89 FF 8A 0F 8B FF 8C 0F 8D FF 8E 0F

8F FF

90 0F

91 FF

92 0F

Address Initial value Remar k

93 FF CCD white defect compensation 94 0F 95 FF 96 0F 97 FF 98 0F

99 FF 9A 0F 9B FF 9C 0F 9D FF 9E 0F

9F FF A0 0F A1 FF A2 0F A3 FF

A4 to FF Fixed data-1 (Initialized data)

5-11

Page 59

1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

1. Video Sync Level Adjustment

Adjust the sync level of the composite video signal output.

Mode PLAY Signal Color bar (Test signal) Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack

(75 Ω terminated)

Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 65 Specified Value A = 286 ± 5 mV (NTSC)

A = 300 ± 5 mV (PAL)

Menu setting:

1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu

...................................... NTSC (NTSC mode)

...................................... PAL (PAL mode)

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 04.

3) Select page: F, address: 65, change the data and set the sync level (A) to the specified value.

4) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

2. Video Burst Level Adjustment

Adjust the burst level of the composite video signal output.

Mode PLAY Signal Color bar (Test signal) Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack

(75 Ω terminated)

Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 66 Specified Value A = 286 ± 5 mV (NTSC)

A = 300 ± 5 mV (PAL)

Menu setting:

1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu

...................................... NTSC (NTSC mode)

...................................... PAL (PAL mode)

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 04.

3) Select page: F, address: 66, change the data and set the burst level (A) to the specified value.

4) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Fig. 5-1-10 Fig. 5-1-11

5-12

Page 60

1-4. CAMERA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT

Before perform the camera system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are satisfied.

1. HALL Adjustment

For detecting the position of lens iris, adjust the HALL AMP gain and offset.

Mode STILL Subject Not required Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 2) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 2E, 2F, 34, 35 Specified Value 13 to 17 during IRIS OPEN

7B to 7F during IRIS CLOSE

Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Note 2: The right two digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the

adjusting remote commander.

1:00:XX

 Displayed data

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: 6, address: 94, and set data: 15.

5) Select page: 6, address: 95, and set data: 7D.

6) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 6D, and press the PAUSE button. (The HALL adjustment is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 2E, 2F, 34 and 35)

7) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

8) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

Checking method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 03.

2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 01, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) during IRIS OPEN satisfies the specified value.

4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 03, and press the PAUSE button.

5) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) during IRIS CLOSE satisfies the specified value.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 6, address: 95, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: 6, address: 94, and set data: 00.

5) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

6) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

7) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-13

Page 61

2. Flange Back Adjustment (Using the minipattern box)

The inner focus lens flange back adjustment is carried out automatically. In whichever case, the focus will be deviated during auto focusing/manual forcusing.

Mode STILL Subject Siemens star chart with ND filter

for minipattern box (Note 1) Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 14 to 25

Adjusting method:

1) Install the minipattern box so that the distance between it and the front of lens of the camera is less than 3cm.

2) Make the height of minipattern box and the camera equal.

3) Check the output voltage of the regulated power supply is the specified voltage ± 0.01 Vdc.

4) Check that the center of Siemens star chart meets the center of shot image screen with the zoom lens at TELE end and WIDE end respectively.

5) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

6) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

7) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

8) Check that the data on page: F, addresses: 14 to 25 are initial values (See table below).

Note 1: Dark Siemens star chart. Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Preparations before adjustments:

The minipattern box is installed as shown in the following figure.

Note 3: The attachment lenses are not used. Note 4: Take car e not to hit the mini-pattern box when extending

the lens.

Specified voltage:The specified voltage varies according to the

minipatternbox, so adjustment the power sup ply output voltage to the specified voltage written on the sheet which is supplied with the minipattern box.

Below 3 cm

Minipattern box

Camera

table

Output voltage : Specified voltage ±0.01 Vdc

Regulated power supply

Output current : more than 3.5 A

Address Data Address Data

14 1C 1D 00 15 94 1E 46 16 26 1F 00 17 EC 20 20 18 13 21 20 19 B9 22 20

1A 00 23 44

1B 00 24 0A 1C 00 25 00

9) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 13, and press the P AUSE button.

10) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 27, and press the PA USE button. (The flange back adjustment is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 14 to 25)

11) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after completion of adjustment:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5) Perform “Flange Back Check”.

Red (+)

Black (–) Yellow (SENS +) White (SENS –)

Black (GND)

Need not connected

Fig. 5-1-12

5-14

Page 62

3. Flang e Back Check

Mode STILL Subject Siemens star

(2.0 m from the front of the lens)

(Luminance: approx. 200 lux) Measurement Point Check operation on TV monitor Measuring Instrument Specified value Focused at the TELE end and

WIDE end

Checking method:

1) Place the Siemens star 2.0 m from the front of the lens.

2) To open the IRIS, decrease the luminous intensity to the Siemens star up to a point before noise appear on the image.

3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

4) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

5) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

6) Shoot the Siemens star with the zoom TELE end.

7) Turn on the auto focus.

8) Check that the lens is focused.

9) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 01.

10) While observe the TV monitor, change the zoom to the WIDE end and check that the lens is focused.

Processing after completion of adjustment:

1) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-15

Page 63

4. F No. Standard Data Input

Compensate the unevenness of the iris meter sensitivity.

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(10 cm from the front of the lens) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 29 to 2D

Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Adjusting method:

1) Shoot the Clear chart with the zoom WIDE end.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

5) Select page: E, address: 51, after noting down the data, set data: FF, and press the PAUSE button.

6) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: BB, and press the PA USE button. (The F No. standard data input is performed and the standard data is stored in page: F, addresses: 29 to 2D)

7) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: E, address: 51, set data noted down at step 5) and press the PAUSE button.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

5) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5. Mechanical Shutter Adjustment

Adjust the period which the mechanical shutter is closed, and compensate the exposure.

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(10 cm from the front of the lens) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 5A, 6C to 7F

Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Adjusting method:

1) Shoot the Clear chart with the zoom WIDE end.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: AD, and press the P A USE button. (The mechanical shutter adjustment is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 5A and 6C to 7F)

6) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

7) Select page: 6, address: AB, and check that the data is “00”. (If the data other than “00”, mechanical shutter adjustment has errors)

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-16

Page 64

6. Picture Frame Setting

Color bar chart picture frame

TV monitor picture frame

E=F

Check on the oscilloscope

Mode STILL Subject Color bar chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack

(75 Ω terminated)

Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope and TV monitor Specified Value A = B, C = D, E = F

Note 1: Displayed data of page 1 of adjusting remote commander.

1:XX:XX

 XL or YL data

 XH or YH data

Setting method:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

2) Adjust the zoom and the camera direction, and set to the picture frame to the specified position.

3) Mark the position of the picture frame on the TV monitor, and adjust the picture frame to this position in following adjustments using “Color reproduction adjustment frame”.

4) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 18.

5) Select page: 1, and note down the XH and XL data. (Note 1)

6) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 22.

7) Select page: 1, and note down the YH and YL data. (Note 1)

8) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

1. Horizontal period

A=B

2. Vertical period

C=D

Fig. 5-1-13

How to reset the zoom and focus when they deviated:

If the zoom and focus deviated due to some reason, reset them in the following method.

1) Select page: 6, address: 90, and set data: XL. (Note 2)

2) Select page: 6, address: 91, and set data: XH. (Note 2)

3) Select page: 6, address: 92, and set data: YL. (Note 3)

4) Select page: 6, address: 93, and set data: YH. (Note 3)

5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 79, press the PAUSE button.

6) Wait for 1 second.

7) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 01.

8) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

Note 2: The data noted down at step 5) of “Setting method”. Note 3: The data noted down at step 7) of “Setting method”.

Fig. 5-1-14

Check on the TV monitor

Fig. 5-1-15

5-17

Page 65

7. Light Level Adjustment and ND Shutter Check

Adjust the standard LV value.

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame) Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 2) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 26, 28 Specified Value AE level 1: 0FE0 to 1020

AE level 2: Below 1100

Note 1: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Note 2: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the

adjusting remote commander.

1:XX:XX

 Displayed data

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 0D, and press the PA USE button. (The light level adjustment is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 26 and 28)

5) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

6) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 06.

7) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) satisfies the AE level 1 specified value.

8) Select page: E, address: 41, set data: 6B, and press the P AUSE button.

9) Select page: 6, address: 1C, and set data: 03.

10) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) satisfies the AE level 2 specified value.

8. Mixed Color Cancel Adjustment

To perform mixed color cancel adjustment based on data of each color in color bar.

Mode STILL Subject Color bar chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address A0 to A3

Note 1: Perform “Light Level Adjustment” before this

adjustment.

Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: D7, and press the PA USE button.

5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: D5, and press the PA USE button. (The mixed color adjustment is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: A0 to A3)

6) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 1C, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: E, address: 41, set data: 6A, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button.

5) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

6) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

7) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-18

Page 66

9. Auto White Balance Standard Data Input

Adjust the white balance standard data at 3200K.

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Adjustment Page F

Adjustment Address 3A to 3D, 59

Note 1: Perform “Light Level Adjustment” and “Mixed Color

Cancel Adjustment” before this adjustment.

Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 11, and press the PA USE button.

5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 0B, and press the P AUSE button. (The auto white balance standard data input is performed and the standard data is stored in page: F, addresses: 3A to 3D, 59)

6) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

4) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5) Perform “Auto White Balance Adjustment”.

10. Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation

Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data with Built-in ND filter. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor.

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Adjustment Page F

Adjustment Address 4F , 50

Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” be-

fore this adjustment.

Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If

not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: 6, address: 1C, set data: 03, and press the PAUSE button.

5) Wait for 1 second.

6) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 11, and press the PAUSE button.

7) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 09, and press the PAUSE button. (The auto white balance adjustment ND filter compensation is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 4F and 50)

8) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 1C, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

6) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-19

Page 67

11. Auto White Balance Adjustment

Adjust to the proper auto white balance output data. If it is not correct, auto white balance and color reproducibility will be poor.

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Filter Filter C14 for color temperature

correction Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 (Note 3) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 3F, 40, 80 Specified Value R ratio: 2820 to 2A60

B ratio: 5DA0 to 5EE0

Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” and

“Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation” before

this adjustment.

Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Note 3: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the

adjusting remote commander.

1:XX:XX

 Displayed data

Adjusting method:

1) Place the C14 filter for color temperature correction on the lens.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: A7, and press the P A USE button.

6) Select page: F, addresses: 49 to 4C, and noting do wn the data of each address.

7) Write data in page: F, addresses: 49 to 4C as shown in the following table.

Adderss 49 4A 4B 4C Data 29 C0 5E 40

Note: After setting each data, be sure to press the PAUSE button

of the adjusting remote commander.

8) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: A5, and press the P A USE button. (The auto white balance adjustment is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 3F, 40 and 80)

9) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

10) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3F, and press the P A USE button.

11) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 04.

12) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 3) satisfies the R ratio specified value.

13) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 05.

14) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 3) satisfies the B ratio specified value.

15) Select page: F, addresses: 49 to 4C, and input the data noted down at step 6).

Note: After setting each data, be sure to press the PAUSE button

of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

5) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-20

Page 68

12. Color Reproduction Adjustment

Adjust the color separation matrix coefficient so that proper color reproduction is produced.

12-1. Color Reproduction Adjustment (Without ND Filter)

Mode STILL Subject Color bar chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 41 to 48, 5C to 5F

Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input”

before this adjustment.

Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: B, address: 67, after noting down the data, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

5) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: AB, and press the P A USE button.

6) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 80, and press the PA USE button.

7) Wait for 1 second.

8) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

9) Wait for 2 seconds.

10) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: A9, and press the PAUSE button. (The color reproduction adjustment (without ND filter) is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 41 to 48, 5C to 5F)

11) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: B, address: 67, set data noted down at step 4) and press the PAUSE button.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

5) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

6) Perform “Color Reproduction Check”.

12-2. Color Reproduction Adjustment (With ND Filter)

Mode STILL Subject Color bar chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 51 to 58, 60 to 63

Note 1: Perform “Auto White Balance Standard Data Input” and

“Auto White Balance ND Filter Compensation” before

this adjustment.

Note 2: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”. If

not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: B, address: 67, after noting down the data, set data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

5) Select page: 6, address: 1C, set data: 03, and press the PA USE button.

6) Wait for 1 second.

7) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: C3, and press the PA USE button.

8) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 80, and press the PA USE button.

9) Wait for 1 second.

10) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

11) Wait for 2 seconds.

12) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: C1, and press the P A USE button. (The color reproduction adjustment (with ND filter) is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F , addresses: 51 to 58 and 60 to 63)

13) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 6, address: 1C, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

3) Select page: B, address: 67, set data noted down at step 4) and press the PAUSE button.

4) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

5) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

6) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

7) Perform “Color Reproduction Check”.

5-21

Page 69

13. Color Reproduction Check

For NTSC mode

Mode STILL Subject Color bar chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Measurement Point Video terminal of A/V OUT jack

(75 Ω terminated)

Measuring Instrument Vectorscope Specified Value All color luminance points shouldsettle

within each color reproduction frame.

Menu setting:

1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu

................................ NTSC (NTSC mode)

................................ PAL (PAL mode)

Checking method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE

button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Check that the picture frame is set to the specified position.

(Refer to “Picture Frame Setting” )

5) Select page: B, address: 67, after noting down the data, set

data: 00, and press the PAUSE button.

6) Select page: 6, address: 10, and set data: 01.

7) Select page: E, address: 52, after noting down the data, set

data: 0A, and press the PAUSE button.

8) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 0F, and press the PAUSE

button.

9) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 80, and press the P AUSE

button.

10) Wait for 1 second.

11) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 00, and press the PA USE

button.

12) Wait for 2 seconds.

13) Check the each color luminance point is in each color repro-

duction frame.

14) Select page: 6, address: 1C, and set data: 03.

15) Wait for 1 second.

16) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 80, and press the PA USE

button.

17) Wait for 1 second.

18) Select page: 6, address: 12, set data: 00, and press the PA USE

button.

19) Wait for 2 seconds.

20) Check the each color luminance point is in each color repro-

duction frame.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE

button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 6, address: 1C, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: 6, address: 10, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: E, address: 52, set data noted down at step 7)

and press the PAUSE button.

5) Select page: B, address: 67, set data noted down at step 5)

and press the PAUSE button.

6) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

7) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE

button.

8) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Burst position

For PAL mode

Burst position

R-Y

Fig. 5-1-16

R-Y

Fig. 5-1-17

B-Y

5-22

Page 70

R-Y

B-Y

4 mm

14. White Balance Check

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(Color reproduction adjustment frame)

Measurement Point Displayed data of Video terminal of

Page: 1 (Note 2) A/V OUT jack

(75 Ω terminated)

Measuring Instrument Adjustment remote Vectorscope

Commander

Specified Value R ratio: 3E00 to 4200 Fig. 5-1-18

B ratio: 3E00 to 4200 (A) and (B)

Note 1: Refer to “Picture Frame Setting” for XH, XL, YH and

YL.

Note 2: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the

adjusting remote commander.

1:XX:XX

 Displayed data

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 6, adderss: 6C, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: E, address: 4B, set data noted down at step 28) and press the PAUSE button.

4) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

5) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

6) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Checking method:

1) Check that the lens is not covered with either filter.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

3) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

4) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

5) Select page: 6, address: 90, and set data: XL. (Note 1)

6) Select page: 6, address: 91, and set data: XH. (Note 1)

7) Select page: 6, address: 92, and set data: YL. (Note 1)

8) Select page: 6, address: 93, and set data: YH. (Note 1)

9) Select page: 6, address: 6C, and set data: 01.

10) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 79, press the PAUSE button.

11) Wait for 1 second.

12) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 01.

• INDOOR data check (without ND filter)

13) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 0F, and press the P A USE button.

14) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 04.

15) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) satisfies the R ratio specified value.

16) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 05.

17) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) satisfies the B ratio specified value.

• INDOOR data check (with ND filter)

18) Select page: 6, address: 1C, and set data: 03.

19) Wait for 1 second.

20) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 04.

21) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) satisfies the R ratio specified value.

22) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 05.

23) Select page: 1, and check that the displayed data (Note 2) satisfies the B ratio specified value.

• INDOOR luminance point check

24) Select page: 6, address: 1C, and set data: 00.

25) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.

26) Check that the center of the white luminance point is within the circle shown Fig. 5-1-18 (A).

• OUTDOOR luminance point check

27) Place the C14 filter on the lens.

28) Select page: E, address: 4B, after noting down the data, set data: 20, and press the PAUSE button.

29) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 3F, and press the P A USE button.

30) Check that the center of the white luminance point settles in the circle shown Fig. 5-1-18 (B).

Fig. 5-1-18 (A)

R-Y

1 mm

B-Y

2 mm

6 mm

Fig. 5-1-18 (B)

5-23

Page 71

15. Strobe White Balance Adjustment

Adjust the white balance when the strobe light flashed.

Mode STILL Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3)

(1.0 m from the front of lens) Adjustment Page F Adjustment Address 4D, 4E, 64, 69, 6A, 6B

Note 1: Perform “Hall Adjustment”, “Flange Back Adjustment”,

“Light Level Adjustment” and “Auto White Balance Ad- justment” before this adjustment.

Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the Flash adjustment box. Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash adjustment box”.

(See page 5-7)

Note 4: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

If not, turn the power of the unit OFF/ON.

Switch setting:

1) FLASH ...................... ON

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: 6, address: 90, and set data: 00.

5) Select page: 6, address: 91, and set data: 00.

6) Select page: 6, address: 92, and set data: 00.

7) Select page: 6, address: 93, and set data: 90.

8) Select page: 6, address: 6C, and set data: 01.

9) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 01.

10) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 79, and press the PA USE button.

11) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 67, and press the PA USE button.

12) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data: 01.

13) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

14) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 79, and press the PA USE button.

15) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 67, and press the PA USE button.

16) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data: 01.

17) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

18) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 79, and press the PA USE button.

19) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: B9, and press the PA USE button. (The strobe white balance adjustment is performed and the adjustment data is stored in page: F, addresses: 4D, 4E, 64, 69, 6A and 6B)

20) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Perform “Strobe Light Lev el and White Balance Check” successively. (Do not turn the power of unit OFF)

16. Strobe Light Level and White Balance Check

Check the light level regulation and the white balance when the strobe light flashed.

Mode STILL Subject Flash adjustment box (Note 3)

(1.0 m from the front of lens) Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 1 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Specified value Y level data: 60 to 94

R-Y level data: FA to FF or 00 to 06

(Note 4)

B-Y level data: FA to FF or 00 to 06

(Note 4)

Note 1: Perform “Hall Adjustment”, “Flange Back Adjustment”,

“Light Level Adjustment” and “Auto White Balance Ad-

justment” before this checking. Perform this checking successively after performing “Strobe White Balance Adjustment”. (Do not turn the power of the unit OFF)

Note 2: Perform this adjustment in the Flash adjustment box. Note 3: Refer to “4. Preparing the Flash adjustment box”.

(See page 5-7)

Note 4: The right four digits of the page: 1 displayed data of the

adjusting remote commander.

1:XX:XX

 B-Y level data

 R-Y level data

Note 5: Displayed data of page: F, address: 64 of theadjusting

remote commander.

F:XX:64

 Y level data

Note 6: Check that the data of page: 6, address: 02 is “00”.

Checking method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 79, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 67, and press the P AUSE button.

4) Check the flashing of strobe light.

5) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

6) Select page: F, address: 64, and check that the data satisfies the Y level data specified value. (Note 5)

7) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 02.

8) Select page: 1, and check the R-Y, B-Y level data (Note 4) satisfies the specified value.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 0, address: 03, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the P AUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

3) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: 6, address: 6C, and set data: 00.

5) Select page: 6, address: 93, and set data: 00.

6) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

7) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

8) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-24

Page 72

17. CCD Black Defect Compensation

18. CCD White Defect Compensation

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(25 cm from the front of lens) Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, address: 55 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page 7 Adjustment Address 60 to 87

Note 1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the

clear chart.

Note 2: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the

screen.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: F, address: DF, after noting down the data, set data: 4C, and press the PAUSE button.

5) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 01.

6) Select page: 6, address: 90, and set data: 00.

7) Select page: 6, address: 91, and set data: 03.

8) Select page: 6, address: 92, and set data: 00.

9) Select page: 6, address: 93, and set data: 00.

10) Select page: 6, address: 6C, and set data: 01.

11) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 79, and press the PA USE button.

12) Select page: 6, address: 30, and set data: 01.

13) Wait for 4 seconds.

14) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 8D, and press the P A USE button. (The CCD black defect compensation is performed and the compensation data is stored in page: 7, addresses: 60 to 87)

15) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

16) Select page: 6, address: 55, and check the data. 00 to 0A: Normal 0B to FF: Defective

17) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

18) Select page: F , address: DF , set data: 5A, and press the PAUSE button.

19) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 89, and press the PA USE button.

20) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

21) Select page: 6, address: 55, and check the data . 00: Normal 01 to FF: Defective

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: F, address: DF, set data noted down at step 4) and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

3) Select page: 6, address: 2C, and set data: 00.

4) Select page: 6, address: 30, and set data: 00.

5) Select page: 6, address: 6C, and set data: 00.

6) Select page: 6, address: 91, and set data: 00.

7) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

8) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

9) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Mode STILL Subject Clear chart

(25 cm from the front of lens) Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 6, address: 55 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page 7 Adjustment Address 88 to A3

Note 1: Check that there are no dust, no dirt and reflection of the

clear chart.

Note 2: Any subject other than the clear chart should be in the

screen.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: FF.

3) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 40, and press the PA USE button of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Select page: F, address: DE, after noting down the data, set data: 1E, and press the PAUSE button.

5) Select page: F, address: E3, after noting down the data, set data: 08, and press the PAUSE button.

6) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 8B, and press the PA USE button. (The CCD white defect compensation is performed and the compensation data is stored in page: 7, addresses: 88 to A3)

7) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

8) Select page: 6, address: 55, and check the data. 00 to 7F: Normal 80 to FF: Defective

9) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

10) Select page: F , address: DE, set data: 0F , and press the P A USE button.

11) Select page: F , address: E3, set data: A0, and press the P A USE button.

12) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 87, and press the PA USE button.

13) Select page: 6, address: 02, and check that the data is “01”.

14) Select page: 6, address: 55, and check the data. 00: Normal 01 to FF: Defective

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: F, address: DE, set data noted down at step 4) and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

2) Select page: F, address: E3, set data noted down at step 5) and press the PAUSE button.

3) Select page: 6, address: 01, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

4) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

5) Select page: D, address: 63, set data: 00, and press the PA USE button.

6) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-25

Page 73

1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

Before perform the LCD system adjustments, check that the specified values of “VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS” are satisfied.

Note 1: The back light (fluorescent tube) is driven with high volt-

age AC power. Therefore, do not touch the back light directly, otherwise you will feel an electric shock.

Note 2: Taken an extreme care not to destroy the liquid crystal

display module by static electricity when replacing it.

Note 3: Set the LCD BRIGHT to the center.

• ATTACHMENT OF CPC-9 JIG

[Adjusting connector]

Most of the measuring points for adjusting the LCD system are concentrated in CN002 of the FK block. Connect the Measuring Instruments via the CPC-9 jig (J-6082393-C). The following table shows the Pin No. and signal name of CN002.

Pin No. Signal Name Pin No. Signal Name

1 N. C. 10 UNREG 2 N. C. 11 LANC IN 3 N. C. 12 LANC OUT 4 REG GND 13 N. C. 5 XCPC_IN 14 RF7 6 N. C. 15 TXD 7 HSY 16 RXD 8 PANEL COM 17 RESET 9 VG 18 VDD

Table 5-1-7

FK (Control switch block) (CN002)

Two claws

Note 1: Don't use the 12 pin flexible board of CPC-9 jig.

It causes damage to the unit.

Note 2: The old CPC-9 jig (Parts code: J-6082-393-B)

cannot be used, because it cannot operate the adjustment remote commander.

CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C) (18p flexible board)

CPC cover

Slide the Release knob in the direction of arrow A. To open the Battery lid.

Release knob

Fig. 5-1-19

5-26

Page 74

1. LCD Initial Data Input

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address 1C, 1D, D0 to D8, DD to DF

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: D, and enter the data gi v en in the following table.

Note: Press the P A USE button of the adjusting remote commander

each time the data are set, as the data are written to nonvolatile memory (EEPROM).

Address Data Remark

1C 00 Fixed value 1D 2C D0 BC Bright Adjustment D1 80 Color Adjustment D2 B9 White Balance Adjustment D3 B7 D4 BE Contrast Adjustment D5 C8 D Range Adjustment D6 7C V-COM Level Adjustment D7 80 VCO Adjutment (NTSC) D8 74 V -COM Adjustment DD 88 VCO Adjutment (PAL) DE 13 Fixed value DF 11

2. VCO Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Set the VCO free-run frequency. If deviated, the LCD screen will be blurred.

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 7 of CN002 (HSY) on

FK block Measuring Instrument Frequency counter Adjustment Page D Specified Value D7 (NTSC)

DD (PAL) Specified Value f = 15734 ± 30 Hz (NTSC)

f = 15745 ± 30 Hz (PAL)

Menu setting:

1) VIDEO OUT of SET UP menu................ NTSC (NTSC mode)

(This adjustment must be performed in NTSC mode, so don't set the menu setting to “PAL”)

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F0, and set data: 01.

3) Select page: D, address: D7, change the data and set the frequency (f) to the NTSC specified value.

4) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

5) Select page: D, address: DD, and change the data and set the frequency (f) to the PAL specified value.

6) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F0, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

5-27

Page 75

3. D Range Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Set the D range of the LCD driver to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen will became blackish or saturated (whitish)

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN002 (VG) on

FK block External trigger: Pin 8 of CN002

(PANEL COM) on FK block Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D5 Specified Value A = 3.62 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 03.

3) Select page: D, address: D5, change the data and set the voltage (A) between the reversed waveform pedestal and non-reversed waveform pedestal to the specified value.

4) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Pedestal

4. Bright Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish).

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN002 (VG) on

FK block External trigger: Pin 8 of CN002

(PANEL COM) on FK b lock Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D0 Specified Value A = 2.00 ± 0.08 Vp-p

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 03.

3) Select page: 2, address: 10, and set data: 01.

4) Select page: D, address: D0, change the data and set the voltage (A) between the pedestal and GAMMA 1 limiter level to the specified value.

5) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 2, address: 10, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Pedestal

A: Pedestal level difference between 1H period and

previous 1H period.

Fig. 5-1-20

GAMMA1 limiter level

Pedestal

Fig. 5-1-21

5-28

Page 76

5. Contrast Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Set the level of the VIDEO signal for driving the LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD screen image will be blackish or saturated (whitish).

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN002 (VG) on

FK block External trigger: Pin 8 of CN002

(PANEL COM) on FK block Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D4 Specified Value A = 3.31 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 03.

3) Select page: D, address: D4, change the data and set the voltage (A) between the pedestal and 10 steps peak to the specified value.

4) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

6. Color Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Set the color saturation to the standard value. If, deviated, the color will be dark or light.

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 9 of CN002 (VG) on

FK block External trigger: Pin 8 of CN002

(PANEL COM) on FK block Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D1 Specified Value A = 544 ± 50 mVp-p

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 04.

3) Select page: D, address: D1, change the data and set the voltage (A) between the white 100% (Reference level) and green to the specified value.

4) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

White 100%

10 steps peak

Pedestal

Green

Fig. 5-1-23

Fig. 5-1-22

5-29

Page 77

7. V-COM Level Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Set the common electrode drive signal level of LCD to the specified value.

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Pin 8 of CN002 (PANEL COM)

on FK block Measuring Instrument Oscilloscope Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D6 Specified Value A = 6.30 ± 0.05 Vp-p

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 03.

3) Select page: D, address: D6, change the data and set the VCOM signal level (A) to the specified value.

4) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

8. V-COM Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Set the DC bias of the common electrode drive signal of LCD to the specified value. If deviated, the LCD display will be move, producing flicker and conspicuous vertical lines.

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Check on LCD screen Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D8 Specified Value The brightness difference

between the section-A and section-B is minimum

Note: Perform “Bright Adjustment” and “Contrast Adjustment”

before this adjustment.

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 01.

3) Select page: 2, address: 10, and set data: 02.

4) Select page: D, address: D8, change the data so that brightness of the section A and section B is equal.

5) Press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander.

Fig. 5-1-24

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

2) Select page: 2, address: 10, and set data: 00.

3) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Fig. 5-1-25

5-30

Page 78

9. White Balance Adjustment (HI-73 Board)

Correct the white balance. If deviated, the LCD screen color cannot be reproduced.

Mode PLAY Signal Arbitrary Measurement Point Check on LCD screen Measuring Instrument Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address D2, D3 Specified Value LCD screen must not be colored

Note: Check the white balance only when replacing the follow-

ing parts. If necessary, adjust them.

1. LCD panel

2. Light induction plate

3. IC803

Adjusting method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 02.

3) Select page: D, address: D2 and D3, and set the data to the initial value. Note: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press

the P A USE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.

Address

D2 D3

4) Check that the LCD screen is not colored. If colored, change the data of page: D, address: D2 and D3 so that the LCD screen is not colored. Note: To write in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM), press

the P A USE button of the adjustment remote commander each time to set the data.

5) Select page: 5, address: F1, and set data: 00.

6) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Data

B9 B7

5-31

Page 79

1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

1. Battery Down Adjustment

Set the battery end voltage. If the voltage is incorrect, the life of battery will shorten. The image at the battery end will also be rough.

Mode STILL Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2,

address: 52 Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address 90 to 94

Connection:

1) Connect the regulated power supply and the digital voltmeter to the battery terminal as shown in Fig. 5-1-26.

Adjusting method:

1) Adjust the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that the digital volt meter display is 3.5 ± 0.1 Vdc.

2) Turn off the power supply.

3) Turn the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander.

4) Turn on the power supply.

5) Insert the memory stick to the unit, and set the STILL mode.

6) Set the FOCUS switch in MANUAL mode.

7) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

8) Decrease the output voltage of the regulated power supply so that the digital voltmeter display is 3.00 ± 0.01 Vdc.

9) Select page: 2, address: 52, read the data, and this data is named Dref.

10) Select page: D, address: 90, set data Dref, and then press the PAUSE button of adjusting remote commander.

11) Convert Dref to decimal notation, and obtain Dref’. (Refer to Table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal-decimal conversion table”)

12) Calculate D91’, D92’, D93’ and D94’ using following equations (decimal calculation), convert it to a hexadecimal number, and input each adjustment address.

Address: 91 D91’ = Dref’+8 Address: 92 D92’ = Dref’+10 Address: 93 D93’ = Dref’+10 Address: 94 D94’ = Dref’+10

Note: After setting each data, be sure to press the PAUSE

button.

Adjustment remote commander

DC power supply (6.0 to 7.2 V DC)

CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C)

Processing after Completing Adjustments:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

Regulated power supply

(3.5 ± 0.1 Vdc)

CN001

Digital voltmeter

DD-148 BOARD

Fig. 5-1-26

5-32

Page 80

2. ZOOM-VR Center Adjustment

Set normal position (center value) of ZOOM-VR.

Mode STILL Subject Arbitrary Measurement Point Displayed data of page: 2

address: 5C (Note 2) Measuring Instrument Adjusting remote commander Adjustment Page D Adjustment Address 89

Note 1: Before adjustment, make sure that the ZOOM-VR is in

mechanical center position.

Note 2: Displayed data of page: 2, address: 5C of the adjusting

remote commander.

2: XX: 5C

 Displayed data

Adjustment method:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 01.

2) Select page: 2, address: 5C.

3) With the ZOOM at TELE end, check the displayed data. (Note

2) F5 to FF: Normal 00 to F4: Defective

4) Return the ZOOM from TELE end to the center, and check the displayed data. (Note 2) 62 to 9E: Normal 00 to 61 and 9F to FF: Defective

5) Read the data checked in step 4), which is assumed to be D1ref.

6) Convert D1ref to decimal notation, and obtain D1ref’. (Refer to Table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal-decimal conv ersion tab le” of “5-2.Service Mode”)

7) With the ZOOM at WIDE end, check the displayed data. (Note 2) 00 to 10: Normal 11 to FF: Defective

8) Return the ZOOM from WIDE end to the center, and check the displayed data. (Note 2) 62 to 9E: Normal 00 to 61 and 9F to FF: Defective

9) Read the data checked in step 8), which is assumed to be D2ref.

10) Convert D2ref to decimal notation, and obtain D2ref’. (Refer to Table 5-2-2. “Hexadecimal-decimal conv ersion tab le” of “5-2.Service Mode”)

11) Check that a difference between D1ref ’ and D2ref’ is 41 or less.

12) From the following equation (calculation of decimal number), calculate Dref’ (omit the decimal fraction) and convert it into hexadecimal number, which is assumed to be Dref.

14) Select page: D, address: 89, set data: D89, and then press the PAUSE button of adjusting remote commander.

Processing after Completing Adjustment:

1) Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

D1ref’ + D2ref’

Dref’ =

13) From the following table, obtain D

Dref D89

63 to 72 73 73 to 90 Dref

91 to 9D 90

89 that corresponds to Dref.

5-33

Page 81

5-2. SERVICE MODE

2-1. ADJUSTING REMOTE COMMANDER

The adjusting remote commander is used for changing the calculation coefficient in signal processing, EVR data, etc. The adjusting remote commander performs bi-directional communication with the unit using the remote commander signal line (LANC). The resultant data of this bi-directional communication is written in the non-volatile memory.

1. Used Adjusting Remote Commander

1) Connect the adjusting remote commander to the CN002 on the FK (control switch block) via CPC-9 jig (J-6082-393-C).

2) Adjust the HOLD switch of the adjusting remote commander to “HOLD” (SERVICE position).

3) Turn on the power with the POWER switch of the unit.

If it has been properly connected, the LCD on the adjusting remote commander will display as shown in Fig. 5-2-1.

0 : 00 : 00

Page Data Address

• Changing the address The address increases when the FF (M) button is pressed, and decreases when the REW (M) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 addresses, from 00 to FF.

• Changing the data (Data setting) The data increases when the PLAY (N) button is pressed, and decreases when the STOP (x) button is pressed. There are altogether 256 data, from 00 to FF.

• Writing the adjustment data The PAUSE button must be pressed to write the adjustment data in the nonvolatile memory. (The new adjustment data will not be recorded in the nonvolatile memory if this step is not performed)

2. Precautions upon Using the Adjusting Remote Commander

Mishandling of the adjusting remote commander may erase the correct adjustment data at times. T o prev ent this, it is recommended that all adjustment data be noted down before beginning adjustments and new adjustment data after each adjustment.

Fig. 5-2-1

4) Operate the adjusting remote commander as follows.

• Changing the page The page increases when the EDIT SEARCH + button is pressed, and decreases when the EDIT SEARCH – button is pressed. There are altogether 16 pages, from 0 to F.

Hexadecimal

notation

LCD Display 01 23456789AbcdEF Decimal notation conversion value

0123456789ABCDEF

0123456789101112131415

Table 5-2-1

5-34

Page 82

2-2. DATA PROCESS

The calculation of the adjusting remote commander display data (hexadecimal notation) are required for obtaining the adjustment data of some adjustment items. In this case, after converting the hexadecimal notation to decimal notation, calculate and convert the result to hexadecimal notation, and use it as the adjustment data. Table 5-2-2. indicates the hexadecimal notation- the decimal notation, calculation table.

Hexadecimal nontation-Decimal notation

The lower digits of the 0 1 2 3 4 56789ABCDEF hexadecimal notation The upper digits of the (A)(b)(c)(d)(E)(F) hexadecimal notation 0 0123456789101112131415 1 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 2 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 3 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 4 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 5 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 6 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 7 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 8 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 9 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 A (A) 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175

1→

B (b) 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 C (c) 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 D (d) 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 E (E) 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239 F (F) 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255

↓

Note : ( ) indicate the adjusting remote control unit display.

(Example) In the case that the adjusting remote control unit display are BD (bd).

As the upper digit of the hexadecimal notation is B (b), and the lower digit is D (d), the intersection “189” of the1 and 2 in the above table is the decimal notation to be calculated.

Table 5-2-2

5-35

Page 83

2-3. SERVICE MODE

1. Setting the Test Mode

Page D Address 10

Data Function

00 Normal 01 Forced STILL mode power ON 02 Forced PLAY mode power ON 03 Forced MOVIE mode power ON

• Before setting the data, select page: 0, address: 01, and set data:

01.

• For page D, the data set is recorded in the non-volatile memory by pressing the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander. In this case, take note that the test mode will not be exited even when the main power is turned off.

• After completing adjustments/repairs, be sure to return the data of this address to “00”, and press the PAUSE button of the adjusting remote commander. Select page: 0, address: 01, and set data: 00.

2. Bit Value Discrimination

Bit values must be discriminated using the display data of the adjusting remote commander for following items. Use the table below to discriminate if the bit value is “1” or “0”

Display on the adjustilng remote commander

3. Balance Sensor Check

Page 2 Address 42

State

Upright state 1 1

Tilt 90° rightward 0 1

Tilt 90° leftward 1 0

Using method:

1) Select page: 2, address: 42.

2) Placing the set in respective states, check from the bit value of displayed data that the sensor operates normally.

4. Switch Check (1)

Page 2 Address 43

Bit Function

SHUTTR SW

(PW block) XSHUTTER LOCK SW

(PW block)

When bit value=1 When bit value=0

Bit values

bit 0 bit 1

OFF ON

0 : 00 : 00

Page

Display on the Bit values Adjusting bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

remote or or or or commander bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4

00000 10001 20010 30011 40100 50101 60110 70111

Example: If “8E” is displayed on the adjusting remote com-

81000

91001 A(A)1010 B(b)1011 C(c)1100 D(d)1101 E(E)1110 F(F)1111

mander, the bit values for bit7 to bit4 ar e shown in the

A column, and the bit values for bit3 to bit0 are shown

in the B column.

bit3 to bit0 discrimination bit7 to bit4 discrimination

Address

Using method:

1) Select page: 2, address: 43

2) By discriminating the bit v alue of dispaly data, the state of the switches can be discriminated.

5-36

Page 84

5. Switch Check (2)

Page 2 Addresses 54 to 56 and 58

Using method:

1) Select page: 2, addresses: 54 to 56 and 58.

2) By discriminating the dispaly data, the pressed key can be discriminated.

Address

54 FLASH OPEN FLASH CLOSE

(KEY AD0) (ST unit) (ST unit)

(IC404 uk) (S001) (S001)

(KEY AD1) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block)

(IC404 ul) (S001) (S001) (S004) (S005) (S007)

(KEY AD2) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block) (FK block)

(IC404 i;) (S001) (S001) (S001) (S002) (S003) (S006) (S006)

(KEY AD4) (CF block) (CF block) (CF block) (CF block) (CF block) (CF block)

(IC404 is) (S001) (S002) (S003) (S004) (S005) (S005)

6. LED Check

Page 2 Address 06 Data 02

Using method:

1) Select page: 2, address: 06, and set data: 02.

2) Check that all LED except for the ACCESS LED are lit.

3) Select page: 2, address: 06, and set data: 00.

00 to 14 15 to 3B 3C to 64 65 to 91 92 to BD BE to F0 F1 to FF

CONTROL DOWN CONTROL UP DISPLAY LCD BRIGHT+ LCD BRIGHT–

CONTROL RIGHT CONTROL LEFT

MACRO SPOT METER WHT BAL W/B SET MANUAL FOCUS AUTO FOCUS

CONTROL SET FLASH PROGRAM AE

Data

LCD BACK LIGHT OFF LCD BACK LIGHT ON

5-375-37 E

Page 85

Lens cabinet assembly (See page 6-4)

Front cabinet assembly (See page 6-2)

Rear cabinet assembly (See page 6-3)

BT901

not supplied

: BT001 (BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY)

Board on the mount position. (See page 4-27)

SECTION 6

REPAIR PARTS LIST

DSC-F505V

6-1. EXPLODED VIEWS

NOTE:

• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may

have some difference from the original one.

• Color Indication of Appearance Parts

Example: KNOB, BALANCE (WHITE) . . . (RED)

↑↑

Parts Color Cabinet's Color

6-1-1. BATTERY HOLDER ASSEMBLY

• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.

• The mechanical parts with no reference number in the exploded views are not supplied.

• Accessories are given in the last of the electrical parts list.

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiquens pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

1 X-3950-714-1 HOLDER ASSY, BATTERY 2 3-056-764-11 COVER, HINGE 3 A-7074-489-A DD-148 BOARD, COMPLETE 4 A-7096-288-A HI-73 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 5 1-675-589-21 FP-132 FLEXIBLE BOARD

6 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 7 3-056-741-01 COVER, AC 8 3-056-740-11 LID, BATTERY 9 3-050-594-01 SPRING, COMPRESSION 10 3-056-744-11 KNOB, LOCK

11 3-056-768-01 COVER, CPC 12 3-713-791-01 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 13 3-736-363-41 TAPPING 14 1-960-051-11 HARNESS (MD-97)

* 15 3-054-937-01 SPRING, BT RELEASE

* 16 3-057-099-01 SHEET, BB FIXED

17 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 18 3-057-094-01 SHEET, HI 19 3-057-943-01 SPRING (B), COMPRESSION COIL BT901 1-694-531-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY

6-1

Page 86

6-1-2. FRONT CABINET ASSEMBLY

not supplied

MIC901

not supplied

(Note)

(Note) Refer to page 2-5 “2-7. Upper cabinet block,

flash unit (MC)” for datails of replacement of Flash unit (MC).

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

51 X-3949-843-1 CABINET (F) ASSY, P 52 X-3950-713-1 HINGE ASSY 53 X-3950-819-1 GRILLE ASSY, MICROPHONE 54 X-3950-715-1 CABINET (UPPER) ASSY 55 X-3949-849-1 RETAINER ASSY, JK

56 X-3950-711-1 CABINET (M) ASSY

* 57 3-057-084-01 SHEET, RELEASE 0 58 1-418-657-11 FLASH UNIT (MC) (Note) * 59 3-056-769-01 GUARD, FP

60 3-056-716-01 COVER, HOOK

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety . Replace only with part number specified.

* 63 3-058-170-01 SHEET, MICROPHONE

64 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 65 3-713-791-01 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 66 3-713-786-21 SCREW (M2X3) 67 3-948-339-61 TAPPING

68 3-719-381-01 SCREW (M2X4) 69 1-960-050-11 HARNESS (MS-114) 70 1-960-061-11 HARNESS (GN-52) 71 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 72 1-678-657-11 FP-37 FLEXIBLE BOARD

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

* 61 3-056-765-01 HOLDER, FP

62 1-476-140-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PW)

73 X-3950-846-1 COVER ASSY, JK (SERVICE) MIC901 1-542-408-11 MICROPHONE UNIT

6-2

Page 87

6-1-3. REAR CABINET ASSEMBLY

121

115

105

114

103

119

115

104

SP901

106

not supplied

116

115

107

114

108

109

ND901

117

111

110

not supplied

112

LCD901

113

115

101

115

122

114

120

102

115

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety . Replace only with part number specified.

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

101 1-418-880-11 TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER 102 1-675-591-21 FP-134 FLEXIBLE BOARD 103 1-476-139-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK)

* 104 3-057-098-01 SHEET, SP PROTECTION * 105 3-057-088-01 RETAINER (SP)

113 3-056-774-01 CUSHION, BL 114 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 115 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 116 3-056-711-01 SCREW (M1.4) 117 7-624-106-04 STOP RING 3.0, TYPE -E

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

106 3-058-280-11 BUTTON, FUNCTION 107 3-056-771-11 BUTTON, BR 108 3-056-770-11 KNOB, BL 109 3-056-707-01 BRACKET, STRAP 110 X-3950-818-1 LEVER ASSY, ZOOM

111 X-3950-717-1 ESCUTCHEON (R) ASSY 112 X-3950-710-1 CABINET (R) ASSY, P

119 1-960-049-11 HARNESS (HB-50) 120 3-056-773-01 SHEET, BL LIGHT INTERCEPTION 121 3-056-030-01 ACE (M1.7), 0 PLATE 2 MAIN LOCK

* 122 3-057-534-01 SHEET, PANEL SHIELD

LCD901 1-803-549-23 MODULE, CRYSTAL INDICATION

0 ND901 1-517-878-21 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE

SP901 1-505-862-51 SPEAKER (2.0cm)

6-3

Page 88

6-1-4. LENS CABINET ASSEMBLY

169

156

157

153

165

not supplied

158

not supplied

170

152

not supplied

166

164

165

not supplied

164

not supplied

166

165

164

not supplied

164

not supplied

165

163

165

168

160

168

167

165

Lens assembly (See page 6-5)

162

159

165

161

170

154

151

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

151 X-3950-707-1 CABINET (MF) ASSY 152 X-3950-817-1 SHEET METAL ASSY, ST 153 X-3950-708-1 CABINET (LT) ASSY 154 X-3950-709-1 CABINET (LB) ASSY 155 1-418-656-11 FOCUS BLOCK, MANUAL

0 156 1-418-658-21 FLASH UNIT (ST)

157 1-675-593-11 FP-136 FLEXIBLE BOARD 158 3-056-688-11 COVER, RELEASE 159 3-056-690-01 SPRING (R), COMPRESSION COIL 160 3-056-689-11 KNOB, RELEASE

155

170

165

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety . Replace only with part number specified.

161 1-418-652-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (CF) 162 3-056-700-02 PLATE, TRIPOD 163 3-056-763-11 ORNAMENT, LENS 164 3-713-791-01 SCREW (M1.7X4), TAPPING, P2 165 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2

166 4-984-006-01 SCREW, STEP 167 3-054-938-01 SCREW, STEP 168 3-713-786-21 SCREW (M2X3) 169 X-3950-716-1 CABINET (ST) ASSY 170 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION

165

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

6-4

Page 89

6-1-5. LENS ASSEMBLY

206

207

216

208

IC101 (Note)

217

215

212

202

212

209

213

M901

214

213

not supplied

M902

not supplied

205

203

210

211

204

201

212

211

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

201 A-7074-485-A PS-434 BOARD, COMPLETE 202 A-7096-289-A SY-62 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE) 203 A-7074-486-A CN-121 BOARD, COMPLETE 204 1-678-656-11 FP-36 FLEXIBLE BOARD 205 3-061-904-01 FRAME, LENS

211 3-914-366-01 SCREW (DIA. 1.7X4), PRECISION 212 3-989-735-51 SCREW (M1.7), LOCK ACE, P2 213 3-318-203-11 SCREW (B1.7X6), TAPPING 214 3-057-094-01 SHEET, HI

* 215 3-061-905-01 HEAT SINK, CD

(Note) Be sure to read “Precuations for Replacement

of CCD Imager” on page 4-10 when changing the CCD imager.

206 3-054-554-11 ADAPTOR (K), CCD FITTING 207 1-758-441-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL 208 3-054-555-11 RUBBER (K), SEAL 209 A-7074-484-A CD-283 BOARD, COMPLETE 210 A-7031-126-A LENS ASSY

216 3-061-906-01 SHEET, 100P FIXED

* 217 3-062-694-01 SHEET, STROBOSCOPE (KBR)

M901 3-709-551-01 MOTOR UNIT, ZOOM STEPPING M902 3-709-400-01 MOTOR, FOCUS STEPPING IC101 A-7031-119-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (Note)

6-5

Page 90

CD-283

6-2. ELECTRICAL PARTS LIST

NOTE:

• Due to standardization, replacements in the parts list may be different from the parts specified in the diagrams or the components used on the set.

• -XX and -X mean standardized parts, so they may have some difference from the original one.

• RESISTORS All resistors are in ohms. METAL: Metal-film resistor. METAL OXIDE: Metal oxide-film resistor. F: nonflammable

• Abbreviation AUS : Australian model CN : Chinese model CND: Canadian model HK : Hong Kong model

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

A-7074-484-A CD-283 BOARD, COMPLETE

C102 1-164-850-11 CERAMIC CHIP 10PF 0.50PF 16V C103 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C104 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C105 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C106 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V

C107 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C108 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V C109 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C110 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C111 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V

C112 1-113-985-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 20V C113 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C114 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C115 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C116 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

C117 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C118 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C119 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C120 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C121 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

C122 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C123 1-104-329-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 50V C124 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C125 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C126 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

C127 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C128 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C129 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C130 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C131 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V

C132 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C133 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C134 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C135 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C136 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V

J : Japanese model JE : Tourist model KR : Korea model

**********************

(IC101 is not included in this complete board)

< CAPACITOR >

• Items marked “*” are not stocked since they are seldom required for routine service. Some delay should be anticipated when ordering these items.

• SEMICONDUCTORS In each case, u: µ, for example: uA. . : µA. . uPA. . : µPA. . uPB. . : µPB. . uPC. . : µPC. . uPD. . : µPD. .

• CAPACITORS uF: µF

• COILS uH: µH

C137 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V

(Ref.No.: 1,000 Series)

C138 1-113-985-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 20V C139 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C140 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C141 1-119-751-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 16V

CN101 1-784-423-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 39P

D101 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 D102 8-719-056-23 DIODE MA2S111- (K8).SO

FB101 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB103 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB104 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB105 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH

* FB106 1-500-282-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH

FB107 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB108 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB109 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB110 1-500-284-21 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH

* FB111 1-500-282-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH

FB113 1-414-227-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH

* FB114 1-500-282-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH

IC101 A-7031-119-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) IC102 8-752-404-95 IC CXD2497R-T4 IC103 8-759-653-62 IC AD80027JSTRL

L101 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH L102 1-412-955-11 INDUCTOR 22uH L103 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L104 1-412-955-11 INDUCTOR 22uH

Q101 8-729-117-73 TRANSISTOR 2SC4178-F13F14-T1

< CONNECTOR >

< DIODE >

< FERRITE BEAD >

< IC >

< COIL >

< TRANSISTOR >

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety. Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiquens pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

When indicating parts by reference number, please include the board.

(Note) Be sure to read “Note on the CCD Imager

Replacement” on page 4-10 when changing the CCD imager.

6-6

Page 91

CD-283 CN-121 DD-148

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

Q102 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q103 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO

< RESISTOR >

R101 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R102 1-218-932-11 RES-CHIP 18 5% 1/16W R104 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R105 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R106 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R107 1-218-931-11 RES-CHIP 15 5% 1/16W R108 1-218-931-11 RES-CHIP 15 5% 1/16W R112 1-208-643-11 RES-CHIP 22 5% 1/16W R113 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R114 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R115 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R119 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R126 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R128 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R129 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W

R138 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R139 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R140 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R141 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R142 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

R143 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R144 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R145 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R146 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R147 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

R148 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R149 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R150 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R152 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0

< VIBRATOR >

X101 1-781-772-21 OSCILLATOR, CRYSTAL (36.818182MHz) X102 1-781-771-21 OSCILLATOR, CRYSTAL (36.5625MHz)

A-7074-486-A CN-121 BOARD, COMPLETE

**********************

(Ref.No.: 1,000 Series)

C010 1-107-823-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 16V

C011 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C012 1-162-966-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 50V C013 1-164-876-11 CERAMIC CHIP 120PF 5% 16V C014 1-164-874-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 16V C015 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V

C016 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C017 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V C018 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C019 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C022 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 16V

C023 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C024 1-164-940-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0033uF 10% 16V C025 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C026 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C027 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V

C028 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C029 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V C030 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V C032 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C033 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V

C034 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C035 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C036 1-109-994-11 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 10V C037 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C038 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V

C039 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C040 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C041 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C042 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C043 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V

C044 1-125-838-91 CERAMIC CHIP 2.2uF 10% 6.3V C045 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C048 1-127-760-91 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V C049 1-127-760-91 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V C050 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V

C051 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V C052 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C053 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C054 1-113-987-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 25V C056 1-109-982-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 10V

< CONNECTOR >

CN001 1-785-967-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 100P CN002 1-785-969-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 100P

A-7074-489-A DD-148 BOARD, COMPLETE

**********************

(Ref.No.: 2,000 Series)

< CAPACITOR >

C001 1-164-227-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 25V C002 1-115-467-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.22uF 10% 10V C003 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C004 1-162-964-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 50V C005 1-162-979-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0027uF 10% 50V

C006 1-164-874-11 CERAMIC CHIP 100PF 5% 16V C007 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C008 1-162-970-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 25V C009 1-162-969-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0068uF 10% 25V

C057 1-127-760-91 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 6.3V C058 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C059 1-113-987-11 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 25V C060 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C061 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V

< CONNECTOR >

CN001 1-774-730-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 3P CN002 1-770-621-21 PIN, CONNECTOR 4P CN003 1-785-917-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 40P

< DIODE >

D001 8-719-074-08 DIODE MA4ZD03001S0 D002 8-719-075-12 DIODE MA3XD21001S0 D003 8-719-071-34 DIODE RB521S-30-TE61 D004 8-719-074-08 DIODE MA4ZD03001S0 D005 8-719-074-08 DIODE MA4ZD03001S0

D006 8-719-074-08 DIODE MA4ZD03001S0 D007 8-719-074-08 DIODE MA4ZD03001S0

6-7

Page 92

DD-148

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

< FUSE >

Q033 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO

0 F001 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) 0 F002 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) 0 F003 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V) 0 F004 1-576-406-21 FUSE, MICRO (1608) (1.4A/32V)

< IC >

IC001 8-759-581-99 IC MB3827PFV-G-BND-ER IC002 8-759-486-48 IC XC6372C351PR

< COIL >

L001 1-416-510-21 INDUCTOR 100uH L002 1-419-353-21 INDUCTOR 10uH L003 1-419-354-21 INDUCTOR 22uH L004 1-419-354-21 INDUCTOR 22uH L005 1-419-354-21 INDUCTOR 22uH

L006 1-414-392-21 INDUCTOR 1uH L007 1-414-428-21 INDUCTOR 1uH L008 1-414-428-21 INDUCTOR 1uH L009 1-469-524-91 INDUCTOR 4.7uH L010 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH

L011 1-414-392-21 INDUCTOR 1uH L012 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH L013 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH L014 1-414-392-21 INDUCTOR 1uH L015 1-469-527-91 INDUCTOR 47uH

L016 1-469-528-91 INDUCTOR 100uH

< RESISTOR >

R001 1-208-939-11 METAL CHIP 150K 0.5% 1/16W R002 1-208-721-11 METAL CHIP 39K 0.5% 1/16W R003 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R004 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W R005 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W

R006 1-208-699-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 0.5% 1/16W R007 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W R008 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R010 1-218-963-11 RES-CHIP 6.8K 5% 1/16W R011 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R012 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R013 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R014 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R015 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R016 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R017 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R018 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R020 1-208-927-11 METAL CHIP 47K 0.5% 1/16W R021 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R022 1-218-968-11 RES-CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W

R023 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R024 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R025 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R026 1-218-981-11 RES-CHIP 220K 5% 1/16W R027 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W

< LINE FILTER >

LF001 1-411-957-11 FILTER, COMMON MODE

< TRANSISTOR >

Q003 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO Q004 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO Q005 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO Q006 8-729-162-13 TRANSISTOR 2SC1621-T1B2 Q007 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO

Q008 8-729-162-13 TRANSISTOR 2SC1621-T1B2 Q009 8-729-043-94 TRANSISTOR CPH3106-PM-TL Q010 8-729-043-94 TRANSISTOR CPH3106-PM-TL Q011 8-729-049-11 TRANSISTOR CPH3206-TL Q012 8-729-047-74 TRANSISTOR CPH5701-TL

Q013 8-729-047-74 TRANSISTOR CPH5701-TL Q014 8-729-047-68 TRANSISTOR 2SK1830-TE85L Q015 8-729-048-19 TRANSISTOR CPH5704-TL Q016 8-729-046-00 TRANSISTOR CPH6301-TL Q017 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO

Q019 8-729-044-84 TRANSISTOR CPH3403-TL Q020 8-729-044-84 TRANSISTOR CPH3403-TL Q021 8-729-048-19 TRANSISTOR CPH5704-TL Q022 8-729-048-19 TRANSISTOR CPH5704-TL Q023 8-729-048-18 TRANSISTOR CPH5601-TL

R028 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W R029 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R030 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W R031 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R032 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R033 1-218-968-11 RES-CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W R034 1-208-701-11 METAL CHIP 5.6K 0.5% 1/16W R035 1-208-721-11 METAL CHIP 39K 0.5% 1/16W R036 1-208-713-11 METAL CHIP 18K 0.5% 1/16W R037 1-208-931-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W

R038 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R039 1-208-707-11 METAL CHIP 10K 0.5% 1/16W R040 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R041 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R042 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W

R043 1-218-970-11 METAL CHIP 27K 0.5% 1/16W R044 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R045 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R046 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R047 1-208-711-11 METAL CHIP 15K 0.5% 1/16W

R049 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R050 1-218-956-11 RES-CHIP 1.8K 5% 1/16W R051 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R052 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R053 1-218-968-11 RES-CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W

Q024 8-729-427-46 TRANSISTOR XP4213-TXE Q025 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q030 8-729-037-71 TRANSISTOR UN9210J- (K8).SO Q031 8-729-042-57 TRANSISTOR UN9110J- (K8).SO Q032 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO

R054 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R055 1-218-952-11 RES-CHIP 820 5% 1/16W R056 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W R057 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R058 1-218-962-11 RES-CHIP 5.6K 5% 1/16W

6-8

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety . Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Page 93

DD-148 HI-73

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

R059 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R060 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R061 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R062 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W R063 1-218-945-11 RES-CHIP 220 5% 1/16W

R064 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R065 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R066 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R067 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R068 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R069 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R070 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R071 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R072 1-218-968-11 RES-CHIP 18K 5% 1/16W R073 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R074 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R075 1-216-296-91 SHORT 0 R076 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R077 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R078 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R079 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W

< TRANSFORMER >

C285 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V C286 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C287 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V

C288 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V C289 1-135-177-21 TANTALUM CHIP 1uF 20% 20V C290 1-125-926-91 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 6.3V C291 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C292 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V

C293 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C294 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V C295 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C297 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C298 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V

C299 1-119-923-81 CERAMIC CHIP 0.047uF 10% 10V C401 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C402 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C409 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V C410 1-104-912-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 6.3V

C411 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C417 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C418 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C426 1-125-891-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 10V C427 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

0 T001 1-433-784-21 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERTER 0 T002 1-433-786-21 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERTER 0 T003 1-433-785-21 TRANSFORMER, DC-DC CONVERTER

A-7096-288-A HI-73 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)

*********************

(Ref.No.: 2,000 Series)

< BATTERY >

BT001 1-756-102-11 BATTERY, LITHIUM SECONDARY

< CAPACITOR >

C253 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C254 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C255 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C258 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C259 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V

C260 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C261 1-164-939-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.0022uF 10% 16V C262 1-125-926-91 TANTAL. CHIP 4.7uF 20% 6.3V C263 1-135-177-21 TANTALUM CHIP 1uF 20% 20V C264 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V

C265 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V C266 1-164-245-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.015uF 10% 25V C267 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C269 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C271 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

C274 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V C278 1-131-862-91 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 4V C279 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C280 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C281 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V

C282 1-115-156-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10V C283 1-117-863-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.47uF 10% 6.3V

C431 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C432 1-164-858-11 CERAMIC CHIP 22PF 5% 16V C433 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C440 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C441 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

C442 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C443 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C446 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C448 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C449 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

C601 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C651 1-113-500-11 TANTAL. CHIP 100uF 20% 10V C652 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C653 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C654 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V

C655 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C656 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C657 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C658 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V C659 1-107-820-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 16V

C660 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C661 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V C662 1-119-750-11 TANTAL. CHIP 22uF 20% 6.3V C663 1-127-569-91 TANTAL. CHIP 100uF 20% 4V C664 1-135-259-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 6.3V

C702 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C703 1-135-181-21 TANTALUM CHIP 4.7uF 20% 6.3V C704 1-107-819-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.022uF 10% 16V C705 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C706 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V

C707 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C708 1-115-566-11 CERAMIC CHIP 4.7uF 10% 10V C801 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C802 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C803 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V

6-9

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety . Replace only with part number specified.

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

Page 94

HI-73

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

C804 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C805 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V C806 1-110-569-11 TANTAL. CHIP 47uF 20% 6.3V C807 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C808 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V

C810 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C811 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C812 1-104-851-11 TANTAL. CHIP 10uF 20% 10V C813 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C814 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V

C815 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C816 1-125-837-91 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 6.3V C902 1-107-687-11 TANTAL. CHIP 3.3uF 20% 20V C903 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C904 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V

C905 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C906 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V C907 1-164-937-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.001uF 10% 16V C908 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V C909 1-107-826-91 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 16V

C911 1-164-739-11 CERAMIC CHIP 560PF 5% 50V C913 1-164-872-11 CERAMIC CHIP 82PF 5% 16V C915 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V C916 1-113-994-11 TANTAL. CHIP 6.8uF 20% 16V C917 1-164-943-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.01uF 10% 16V

C918 1-125-777-11 CERAMIC CHIP 0.1uF 10% 10V C919 1-107-689-21 TANTAL. CHIP 1uF 20% 35V C920 1-107-682-11 CERAMIC CHIP 1uF 10% 16V

< CONNECTOR >

* CN251 1-770-619-11 PIN, CONNECTOR 2P

CN252 1-778-506-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 2P CN701 1-784-423-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 39P CN702 1-784-423-21 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 39P CN703 1-793-641-11 CONNECTOR, MEMORY STICK

(MEMORY STICK)

CN704 1-784-420-11 CONNECTOR, FFC/FPC (ZIF) 21P CN705 1-778-596-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 30P CN706 1-793-302-21 PIN, CONNECTOR (PC BOARD) 5P CN707 1-778-803-11 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 40P CN901 1-778-596-21 CONNECTOR, BOARD TO BOARD 30P

< DIODE >

IC401 8-759-642-45 IC TL1596CPWR IC402 8-759-525-51 IC S-80827HNNP-A9A-T2 IC404 8-759-679-10 IC S579630PZ-TEB IC405 8-759-538-14 IC S-3513BEFS-TB

IC406 8-759-566-20 IC AK6440BH-E2 IC407 8-759-525-53 IC RN5RZ31BA-TL IC408 8-759-466-71 IC S-80820ANNP-EDH-T2 IC601 8-759-657-69 IC PDIUSBP11APW, 118 IC651 8-759-652-45 IC NJM2568V (TE2)

IC701 8-759-592-68 IC S-8328H55MC-FZJ-TZ IC801 8-759-364-05 IC MB40D001PFV-G-BND-ER IC803 8-759-539-27 IC IR3Y37A4 IC901 8-759-587-61 IC LZ9GH234 IC902 8-759-327-01 IC NJM062V (TE2)

< COIL >

L252 1-414-402-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L254 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH L255 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L401 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L651 1-414-756-11 INDUCTOR 47uH

L652 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L701 1-414-398-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L703 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L704 1-419-161-21 INDUCTOR 33uH L801 1-414-757-11 INDUCTOR 100uH

L802 1-414-078-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L901 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L902 1-414-754-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L903 1-412-951-11 INDUCTOR 10uH L905 1-412-949-21 INDUCTOR 6.8uH

< TRANSISTOR >

Q253 8-729-041-51 TRANSISTOR FMMT617TA Q254 8-729-042-74 TRANSISTOR UN9216J- (K8).SO Q255 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (K8).SO Q401 8-729-037-92 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-R (TX).SO Q405 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (K8).SO

Q406 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q409 8-729-041-43 TRANSISTOR HN1L02FU (TE85R) Q410 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q411 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q412 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO

D401 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 D406 8-719-056-48 DIODE 1SS388 (TPL3) D408 8-719-056-23 DIODE 1SS387-TPL3 D410 8-719-056-48 DIODE 1SS388 (TPL3) D701 8-719-058-12 DIODE CL-220UR-C-TS (ACCESS)

D703 8-719-073-01 DIODE MA111- (K8).S0 D705 8-719-066-34 DIODE RB461F-T106 D903 8-713-102-80 DIODE 1T369-01-T8A D904 8-719-976-96 DIODE MA8047-H-TX

< FERRITE BEAD >

FB601 1-414-228-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB703 1-500-284-21 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB704 1-414-594-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH FB705 1-414-594-11 INDUCTOR CHIP 0uH

< IC >

IC253 8-759-655-17 IC AN2905FHQ-EB

Q413 8-729-042-58 TRANSISTOR UN9111J- (K8).SO Q601 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (K8).SO Q651 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO Q652 8-729-230-60 TRANSISTOR 2SA1586YG-TE85L Q701 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO

Q702 8-729-032-00 TRANSISTOR 2SJ381-TD Q703 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q704 8-729-427-16 TRANSISTOR XP4113-TXE Q705 8-729-427-46 TRANSISTOR XP4213-TXE Q706 8-729-041-24 TRANSISTOR NDS355AN

Q707 8-729-037-61 TRANSISTOR UN9113J- (K8).SO Q708 8-729-037-74 TRANSISTOR UN9213J- (K8).SO Q903 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO Q904 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO Q905 8-729-037-52 TRANSISTOR 2SD2216J-QR (K8).SO

Q906 8-729-037-53 TRANSISTOR 2SB1462J-QR (K8).SO

6-10

Page 95

HI-73

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

< RESISTOR >

R449 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R251 1-218-954-11 RES-CHIP 1.2K 5% 1/16W R254 1-208-690-11 RES-CHIP 2K 5% 1/16W R255 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R256 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R259 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W

R260 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R262 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R263 1-218-970-11 RES-CHIP 27K 5% 1/16W R265 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R266 1-218-974-11 RES-CHIP 56K 5% 1/16W

R270 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W R271 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W R272 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R273 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R277 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W

R279 1-218-929-11 RES-CHIP 10 5% 1/16W R280 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R281 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R282 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R283 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R284 1-218-957-11 RES-CHIP 2.2K 5% 1/16W R285 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R286 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R287 1-220-202-11 RES-CHIP 43K 5% 1/16W R288 1-218-941-11 RES-CHIP 100 5% 1/16W

R450 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R451 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R452 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R453 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R454 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R455 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R462 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R463 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R464 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R465 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R466 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R467 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R468 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R469 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R470 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R471 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R472 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R475 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R476 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R478 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R479 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R480 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R483 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R484 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R485 1-218-946-11 RES-CHIP 270 5% 1/16W

R289 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R290 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R291 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R292 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R401 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R402 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R404 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R405 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R406 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R407 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R408 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R420 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R422 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R423 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R425 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W

R426 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R427 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R428 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R429 1-218-958-11 RES-CHIP 2.7K 5% 1/16W R430 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R431 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R432 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R433 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R434 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R435 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R487 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R489 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R490 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R491 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R492 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R493 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R494 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R495 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R496 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R497 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W

R603 1-218-955-11 RES-CHIP 1.5K 5% 1/16W R604 1-220-168-11 RES-CHIP 24 5% 1/16W R605 1-220-168-11 RES-CHIP 24 5% 1/16W R606 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R607 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0

R608 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R651 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R652 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R653 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R654 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W

R655 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R656 1-218-939-11 RES-CHIP 68 5% 1/16W R657 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R658 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R701 1-218-951-11 RES-CHIP 680 5% 1/16W

R436 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R437 1-218-953-11 RES-CHIP 1K 5% 1/16W R438 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R439 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R444 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W

R445 1-218-985-11 RES-CHIP 470K 5% 1/16W R446 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R447 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R448 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W

R702 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R703 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R704 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R705 1-218-959-11 RES-CHIP 3.3K 5% 1/16W R706 1-218-942-11 RES-CHIP 120 5% 1/16W

R708 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R709 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R802 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0 R803 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W

6-11

Page 96

HI-73

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

R804 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W

R807 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R808 1-218-967-11 RES-CHIP 15K 5% 1/16W R809 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R812 1-218-966-11 RES-CHIP 12K 5% 1/16W R813 1-218-972-11 RES-CHIP 39K 5% 1/16W

R815 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R816 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R820 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R821 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0 R822 1-216-295-91 SHORT 0

R905 1-218-987-11 RES-CHIP 680K 5% 1/16W R908 1-218-978-11 RES-CHIP 120K 5% 1/16W R912 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R913 1-218-965-11 RES-CHIP 10K 5% 1/16W R914 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W

R915 1-218-989-11 RES-CHIP 1M 5% 1/16W R916 1-218-969-11 RES-CHIP 22K 5% 1/16W R918 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W R920 1-208-931-11 METAL CHIP 68K 0.5% 1/16W R921 1-218-975-11 RES-CHIP 68K 5% 1/16W

R922 1-216-841-11 METAL CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R924 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R926 1-218-961-11 RES-CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W R929 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R930 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W

Electrical parts list of the PS-434 board and SY-62 board are not shown. Pages 6-13 to 6-15 are not shown.

R932 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R933 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R938 1-218-977-11 RES-CHIP 100K 5% 1/16W R939 1-218-971-11 RES-CHIP 33K 5% 1/16W R940 1-218-990-11 SHORT 0

R941 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R942 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R943 1-208-719-11 METAL CHIP 33K 0.5% 1/16W R944 1-208-715-11 METAL CHIP 22K 0.5% 1/16W R967 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W

R968 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R969 1-218-937-11 RES-CHIP 47 5% 1/16W R978 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R979 1-218-973-11 RES-CHIP 47K 5% 1/16W R981 1-216-829-11 METAL CHIP 4.7K 5% 1/16W

< SENSOR >

SE401 1-771-701-21 SWITCH, SLANT (BALANCE SENSOR)

< VIBRATOR >

X401 1-767-980-21 VIBRATOR, CERAMIC (20MHz) X402 1-760-458-21 VIBRATOR, CRYSTAL (32.768kHz)

A-7074-485-A PS-434 BOARD, COMPLETE

**********************

(Ref.No.: 1,000 Series)

A-7096-289-A SY-62 BOARD, COMPLETE (SERVICE)

*********************

(Ref.No.: 1,000 Series)

6-12

Page 97

Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark Ref. No. Part No. Description Remark

MISCELLANEOUS

***************

ACCESSORIES

*************

5 1-675-589-21 FP-132 FLEXIBLE BOARD 14 1-960-051-11 HARNESS (MD-97)

0 58 1-418-657-11 FLASH UNIT (MC) (Note 1)

62 1-476-140-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (PW) 69 1-960-050-11 HARNESS (MS-114)

70 1-960-061-11 HARNESS (GN-52) 72 1-678-657-11 FP-37 FLEXIBLE BOARD 101 1-418-880-11 TRANSFORMER UNIT, INVERTER 102 1-675-591-21 FP-134 FLEXIBLE BOARD 103 1-476-139-11 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (FK)

119 1-960-049-11 HARNESS (HB-50) 155 1-418-656-11 FOCUS BLOCK, MANUAL

0 156 1-418-658-21 FLASH UNIT (ST)

157 1-675-593-11 FP-136 FLEXIBLE BOARD 161 1-418-652-21 SWITCH BLOCK, CONTROL (CF)

204 1-678-656-11 FP-36 FLEXIBLE BOARD 207 1-758-441-11 FILTER BLOCK, OPTICAL 209 A-7074-484-A CD-283 BOARD, COMPLETE BT901 1-694-531-11 TERMINAL BOARD, BATTERY IC101 A-7031-119-A CCD BLOCK ASSY (CCD IMAGER) (Note 2)

LCD901 1-803-549-23 MODULE, CRYSTAL INDICATION M901 3-709-551-01 MOTOR UNIT, ZOOM STEPPING M902 3-709-400-01 MOTOR, FOCUS STEPPING MIC901 1-542-408-11 MICROPHONE UNIT

0 ND901 1-517-878-21 TUBE, FLUORESCENT, COLD CATHODE

SP901 1-505-862-51 SPEAKER (2.0cm)

0 1-475-851-12 ADAPTOR, AC (J) 0 1-475-851-22 ADAPTOR, AC (US, CND) 0 1-475-851-33 ADAPTOR, AC (AEP, UK, E, HK, AUS, JE) 0 1-475-851-71 ADAPTOR, AC (KR) 0 1-475-851-81 ADAPTOR, AC (CN)

0 1-555-074-21 CORD, POWER (AUS) 0 1-569-008-21 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION 2P (E) 0 1-573-856-11 ADAPTOR, CHANGE (JE) 0 1-769-608-11 CORD, POWER (AEP, UK, E, HK) 0 1-770-019-11 ADAPTOR, CONVERSION PLUG 3P (UK, HK)

0 1-776-985-11 CORD, POWER (KR) 0 1-782-476-11 CORD, POWER (CN)

1-783-738-31 CORD, CONNECTION

(A/V CONNECTING CABLE 1.5m)

1-783-739-22 CORD, CONNECTION

(DK-115 DC CONNECTING CABLE 1.6m)

0 1-790-073-11 CORD, POWER 2P (J, JE)

0 1-790-107-22 CORD, POWER (US, CND)

1-791-785-11 CORD, CONNECTION (USB CABLE) 3-056-776-01 STRAP, LIST 3-060-716-01 SOFT (2000), BUNDLE (CD-ROM) 3-061-981-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (JAPANESE) (J)

3-061-981-11 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ENGLISH)

(US, CND, AEP, UK, E, HK, AUS, CN, JE)

3-061-981-21 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (FRENCH, GERMAN)

(CND, AEP, JE)

3-061-981-31 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION

(SPANISH, PORTUGUESE) (AEP, E, JE)

3-061-981-41 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION

(ITALIAN, DUTCH) (AEP)

3-061-981-51 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (CHINESE)

(E, HK, CN, JE)

(Note 1) Refer to page 2-5 “2-7. Upper cabinet block,

flash unit (MC)” for datails of replacement of Flash unit (MC).

(Note 2) Be sure to read “Precuations for Replacement

of CCD Imager” on page 4-10 when changing the CCD imager.

3-061-981-61 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION

3-061-981-71 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (ARABIC) (E) 3-061-981-81 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION (KOREAN) (KR, JE) 3-724-594-21 STRING, CAP

3-866-482-01 MANUAL, INSTRUCTION ( )

X-3949-850-1 CAP ASSY, LENS

The components identified by mark 0 or dotted line with mark 0 are critical for safety . Replace only with part number specified.

(RUSSIAN, SWEDISH) (AEP, JE)

Les composants identifiés par une marque 0 sont critiques pour la sécurité. Ne les remplacer que par une pièce portant le numéro spécifié.

(JAPANESE) (J)

6-16 E

6-15

Page 98

FOR CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION ADJUSTMENT

Take a copy of CAMERA COLOR REPRODUCTION FRAME and Parts reference sheets with a clear sheet for use.

For NTSC mode

R-Y

B-Y

✄

For PAL mode

DSC-F505V

R-Y

B-Y

✄

DSC-F505V

– 134 –

Page 99

< PARTS REFERENCE SHEET >

You can find the parts position of mount locations applying to HI-73 board of a set.

✄

HI-73

123456

IC404

IC901

IC253

SIDE A

IC801

IC803

SIDE B

123456

HI-73

✄

– 135 –

Page 100

DSC-F505V

9-929-831-31

Sony EMCS Co.

– 136 –

2001J0500-1

C 2001. 10

Published by DI Customer Center

Sony DSC-F505V Service manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SERVICE NOTE

GENERAL

DISASSEMBLY

6 Zoom lens block

Cabinet (LT) block

4 Front cabinet assembly

7 Flash unit (ST)

BLOCK DIAGRAMS

HI-73 (VIDEO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveforms.

HI-73 (AUDIO) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board.

HI-73 (USB I/F) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board.

HI-73 (HI CONTROL) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See pag e 4-27 for HI-73 printed wiring board. • See page 4-55 for waveforms.

DD-148 (DC/DC CONVERTER) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM • See page 4-56 for waveform.

FK (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

CF (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK)/MANUAL FOCUS BLOCK, ST (FLASH UNIT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS PW (CONTROL SWITCH BLOCK), MC (FLASH UNIT) SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS

Before starting adjustment

ADJUSTMENTS

1-1. PREPARATIONS BEFORE ADJUSTMENT

1-2. INITIALIZATION OF B, D, E, F, 7 PAGE DATA

1-3. VIDEO SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

1-5. LCD SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

1-6. SYSTEM CONTROL SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS

2-1. ADJUSTING REMOTE COMMANDER

2-2. DATA PROCESS

2-3. SERVICE MODE

REPAIR PARTS LIST

CD-283